Parameter Manual Edition 04/2006

Transcription

1 Parameter Manual Edition 04/2006 Control Unit CU240S CU240S DP CU240S DP-F Software version 2.0 SINAMICS G20 s

2

3 Function diagrams 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G20 Faults and Alarms 3 Abbreviations 4 Parameter Manual Software version V2.0 04/2006 A5E B

4 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Prescribed Usage Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance. Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Standard Drives Postfach Erlangen GERMANY Order No.: Edition 04/2006 Copyright Siemens AG Technical data subject to change

5 Table of contents Table of contents Introduction to Quick commissioning (P000 = )....3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview Binector Input Connector Input Binector Output Connector Output Connector/Binector Output List of Function diagrams Faults and Alarms Abbreviations Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 5

6

7 . Introduction to. Introduction to The layout of the parameter description is as follows. Figure - Read-only parameter Figure -2 Write parameter Parameter number Indicates the relevant parameter number. The numbers used are 4-digit numbers in the range 0000 to Numbers prefixed with an r indicate that the parameter is a read-only parameter, which displays a particular value but cannot be changed directly by specifying a different value via this parameter number (in such cases, dashes - are entered at the points Unit, Min, Def and Max in the header of the parameter description. All other parameters are prefixed with a P. The values of these parameters can be changed directly in the range indicated by the Min and Max settings in the header. [index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the number of indices available. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 7

8 . Introduction to Parameter text (Long name/short name) Indicates the name of the relevant parameter. Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI, and CO followed by a colon. These abbreviations have the following meanings: BI = P9999 (0) Binector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of a binary signal BO = r9999 Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as a binary signal CI = CO = CO/BO = r9999 (999:9) r9999 [99] r9999 r9999 Connector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of an analog signal Connector output, i.e. parameter connects as an analog signal Connector/Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as an analog signal and/or as a binary signal To make use of BICO you will need access to the full parameter list. At this level many new parameter settings are possible, including BICO functionality. BICO functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and output functions. It can be used in most cases in conjunction with the simple, level 2 settings. The BICO system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial etc.) and outputs (inverter current, frequency, analog output, relays, etc.). Access level (refers only to access via Operator Panel (OP)) Indicates the level of user access. There are four access levels: Standard, Extended, Expert and Service. The number of parameters that appear in each functional group depends on the access level set in P0003 (user access level). P-Group (refers only to access via Operator Panel (OP)) Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. Note Parameter P0004 (parameter filter) acts as a filter and focuses access to parameters according to the functional group selected. Data type The data types available are shown in the table below. Notation U6 U32 I6 I32 Floating Point Meaning 6-bit unsigned 32-bit unsigned 6-bit integer 32-bit integer Floating point 8 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

9 . Introduction to QuickComm Indicates whether or not (Yes or No) a parameter can only be changed during quick commissioning, i.e. when P000 (parameter groups for commissioning) is set to (quick commissioning). Active YES changes to the parameter values take effective immediately after they have been entered NO the P button on the Operator Panel must be pressed before the changes take effect Data set which are dependent on a data set are identified as follows: CDS (command data set) DDS (drive data set) Can be changed Commissioning status of the parameter. Three states are possible: Commissioning C Run U Ready to run T This indicates when the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states may be specified. If all three states are specified, this means that it is possible to change this parameter setting in all three inverter states. Unit Indicates the unit of measure applicable to the parameter values Min Indicates the minimum value to which the parameter can be set. Max Indicates the maximum value to which the parameter can be set. Factory setting Indicates the default value, i.e. the value which applies if the user does not specify a particular value for the parameter. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 9

10 . Introduction to Description Explanation of the function of a parameter. Values Lists the possible values of a parameter. Recommendation Information about recommended settings. Index The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters. Bit field For parameters with bit fields, the following information is provided about each bit: Bit number and signal name Meaning with signal states 0 and Function diagram (optional). The signal is shown on this function diagram. Dependency Conditions which need to be fulfilled in connection with this parameter. Also includes special effects which can occur between this parameter and others. Seven-segment display The seven-segment display is structured as follows: Segment Bit Segment Bit The significance of the relevant bits in the display is described in the status and control word parameters. 0 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

11 .2 Quick commissioning (P000 = ).2 Quick commissioning (P000 = ) The following parameters are necessary for quick commissioning (P000 = ). Par.-No. Name Access level Can be changed P000 Europe / North America C P0205 Inverter application 3 C P0300 Select motor type 2 C P0304 Rated motor voltage C P0305 Rated motor current C P0307 Rated motor power C P0308 Rated motor cosphi C P0309 Rated motor efficiency C P030 Rated motor frequency C P03 Rated motor speed C P034 Motor pole pair number 3 C P0320 Motor magnetizing current 3 CT P0335 Motor cooling 2 CT P0400 Select encoder type 2 CT P0408 Encoder pulses per revolution 2 CT P0500 Technological application 3 CT P0625 Ambiant motor temperature 3 CUT P0640 Motor overload factor [%] 2 CUT P0700 Selection of 2/3-wire method 2 CT P0700 Selection of command source CT P000 Selection of frequency setpoint CT P080 Min. frequency CUT P082 Max. frequency CT P20 Ramp-up time CUT P2 Ramp-down time CUT P35 OFF3 ramp-down time 2 CUT P300 Control mode 2 CT P500 Selection of torque setpoint 2 CT P900 Select motor data identification 2 CT P960 Speed control optimisation 3 CT P3900 End of quick commissioning C When P000 = is chosen, P0003 (user access level) can be used to select the parameters to be accessed. This parameter also allows selection of a user-defined parameter list for quick commissioning. At the end of the quick commissioning sequence, set P3900 = to carry out the necessary motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included in P000 = ) to their default settings. This applies only in Quick Commissioning mode. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

12 .3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview.3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview Command Data Sets (CDS) P0700[3] Selection of command source P070[3] Function of digital input 0 P0702[3] Function of digital input P0703[3] Function of digital input 2 P0704[3] Function of digital input 3 P0705[3] Function of digital input 4 P0706[3] Function of digital input 5 P0707[3] Function of digital input 6 P0708[3] Function of digital input 7 P0709[3] Function of digital input 8 P072[3] Analog / digital input 0 P073[3] Analog / digital input P079[3] Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. P073[3] Function of digital output 0 P0732[3] Function of digital output P0733[3] Function of digital output 2 P0800[3] Download parameter set 0 P080[3] Download parameter set P0840[3] ON/OFF P0842[3] ON reverse/off P0844[3]. OFF2 P0845[3] 2. OFF2 P0848[3]. OFF3 P0849[3] 2. OFF3 P0852[3] Pulse enable P000[3] Selection of frequency setpoint P020[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 P02[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit P022[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 P023[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 P035[3] Enable MOP (UP-command) P036[3] Enable MOP (DOWN-command) P055[3] Enable JOG right P056[3] Enable JOG left P070[3] Main setpoint P07[3] Main setpoint scaling P074[3] Disable additional setpoint P075[3] Additional setpoint P076[3] P0[3] P3[3] P24[3] P40[3] P4[3] P42[3] P230[3] P330[3] P477[3] P478[3] P492[3] P500[3] P50[3] P503[3] P5[3] P522[3] P523[3] P203[3] P204[3] P206[3] P2200[3] Additional setpoint scaling Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint Reverse Enable JOG ramp times RFG enable RFG start RFG enable setpoint Enable DC braking Voltage setpoint Set integrator of n-ctrl. Set integrator value n-ctrl. Enable droop Selection of torque setpoint Change to torque control Torque setpoint Additional torque setpoint Upper torque limit Lower torque limit. Faults acknowledgement 2. Faults acknowledgement External fault Enable PID controller P2220[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 P222[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit P2222[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 P2223[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 P2235[3] P2236[3] P2253[3] P2254[3] P2264[3] P2480[3] Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) PID setpoint PID trim source PID feedback Enable positioning ramp down P0800, P080, P522, P523, P2200 will be altered in the state "Ready" only, all other parameters will be altered during data set switchover (CDS) in the state "Run". 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

13 .3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview Drive Data Sets (DDS) P0005[3] Display selection r0035[3] Act. motor temperature P029[3] Inverter protection P0300[3] Select motor type P0304[3] Rated motor voltage P0305[3] Rated motor current P0307[3] Rated motor power P0308[3] Rated motor cosphi P0309[3] Rated motor efficiency P030[3] Rated motor frequency P03[3] Rated motor speed r033[3] Motor pole pairs P034[3] Motor pole pair number P0320[3] Motor magnetizing current r0330[3] Rated motor slip r033[3] Rated magnetization current r0332[3] Rated power factor r0333[3] Rated motor torque P0335[3] Motor cooling P0340[3] Calculation of motor parameters P034[3] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] P0342[3] Total/motor inertia ratio P0344[3] Motor weight r0345[3] Motor start-up time P0346[3] Magnetization time P0347[3] Demagnetization time P0350[3] Stator resistance (line) P035[3] Stator resistance (line-to-line) P0352[3] Cable resistance P0354[3] Rotor resistance P0356[3] Stator leakage inductance P0358[3] Rotor leakage inductance P0360[3] Main inductance P0362[3] Magnetizing curve flux P0363[3] Magnetizing curve flux 2 P0364[3] Magnetizing curve flux 3 P0365[3] Magnetizing curve flux 4 P0366[3] Magnetizing curve imag P0367[3] Magnetizing curve imag 2 P0368[3] Magnetizing curve imag 3 P0369[3] Magnetizing curve imag 4 r0370[3] Stator resistance [%] r0372[3] Cable resistance [%] r0373[3] Rated stator resistance [%] r0374[3] Rotor resistance [%] r0376[3] Rated rotor resistance [%] r0377[3] Total leakage reactance [%] r0382[3] Main reactance [%] r0384[3] Rotor time constant r0386[3] Total leakage time constant P0400[3] Select encoder type P0405[3] Enables selection of various pulse types. P0408[3] Encoder pulses per revolution P040[3] Reverses internal direction sense. P049[3] Reaction on speed signal loss P0492[3] Allowed speed difference P0494[3] Delay speed loss reaction P0500[3] Technological application P060[3] Motor temperature sensor P0604[3] Threshold motor temperature P062[3] Motor temperature identification after restart P0622[3] Motor magnetizing time for temperature identification after start up r0623[3] Display for the identified stator resistance P0625[3] Ambient motor temperature P0626[3] Overtemperature stator iron P0627[3] Overtemperature stator winding P0628[3] Overtemperature rotor winding r0630[3] Motor model ambient temperature r063[3] Stator iron temperature r0632[3] Stator winding temperature r0633[3] Rotor winding temperature P0640[3] Motor overload factor [%] P00[3] Fixed frequency P002[3] Fixed frequency 2 P003[3] Fixed frequency 3 P004[3] Fixed frequency 4 P005[3] Fixed frequency 5 P006[3] Fixed frequency 6 P007[3] Fixed frequency 7 P008[3] Fixed frequency 8 P009[3] Fixed frequency 9 P00[3] Fixed frequency 0 P0[3] Fixed frequency P02[3] Fixed frequency 2 P03[3] Fixed frequency 3 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 3

14 .3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview P04[3] Fixed frequency 4 P05[3] Fixed frequency 5 P03[3] Setpoint memory of the MOP P040[3] Setpoint of the MOP P058[3] JOG frequency P059[3] JOG frequency left P060[3] JOG ramp-up time P06[3] JOG ramp-down time P080[3] Min. frequency P082[3] Max. frequency P09[3] Skip frequency P092[3] Skip frequency 2 P093[3] Skip frequency 3 P094[3] Skip frequency 4 P0[3] Skip frequency bandwidth P20[3] Ramp-up time P2[3] Ramp-down time r23[3] Actual ramp-up time P30[3] Ramp-up initial rounding time P3[3] Ramp-up final rounding time P32[3] Ramp-down initial rounding time P33[3] Ramp-down final rounding time P34[3] Rounding type P35[3] OFF3 ramp-down time P202[3] Motor-current: Flying start P203[3] Search rate: Flying start P232[3] DC braking current P233[3] Duration of DC braking P234[3] DC braking start frequency P236[3] Compound braking current P240[3] Configuration of Vdc controller P243[3] Dynamic factor of Vdc-max P245[3] Switch on level kin. buffering r246[3] Switch-on level kin buffering P247[3] Dyn. factor of kinetic buffering P250[3] Gain of Vdc-controller P25[3] Integration time Vdc-controller P252[3] Differential time Vdc-controller P253[3] Vdc-controller output limitation P256[3] Reaction of kinetic buffering P257[3] Freq limit for kinetic buffering P300[3] Control mode P30[3] Continuous boost P3[3] Acceleration boost P32[3] Starting boost P36[3] Boost end frequency P320[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. P32[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. P322[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 P323[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 P324[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 P325[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 P333[3] P334[3] P335[3] P336[3] P338[3] P340[3] P34[3] P345[3] P346[3] P350[3] P400[3] P442[3] P452[3] P460[3] P462[3] P470[3] P472[3] P488[3] P489[3] P496[3] P499[3] P520[3] P52[3] P525[3] P530[3] P53[3] P570[3] P574[3] P580[3] P582[3] P590[3] P592[3] P596[3] P60[3] P6[3] P654[3] P75[3] P77[3] P745[3] P750[3] Start frequency for FCC Slip compensation activation range Slip compensation Slip limit Resonance damping gain V/f Imax controller prop. gain Imax controller integral time Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain Imax voltage ctrl. integral time Voltage soft start Configuration of speed control Filter time for act. speed Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) Gain speed controller Integral time speed controller Gain speed controller (SLVC) Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) Droop input source Droop scaling Scaling accel. precontrol Scaling accel. torque control Upper torque limit Lower torque limit Scaling lower torque limit Motoring power limitation Regenerative power limitation Fixed value flux setpoint Dynamic voltage headroom Efficiency optimization Smooth time for flux setpoint Gain of flux controller Integral time of flux controller Int. time field weak. controller Continuous torque boost (SLVC) Acc. torque boost (SLVC) Smooth time for Isq setpoint Gain current controller Integral time current controller Flux variance limit in stall Control word of motor model 4 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

15 .3 Command and Drive Data Sets - Overview P755[3] P756[3] P758[3] P759[3] P764[3] P767[3] P780[3] P78[3] P786[3] P803[3] P820[3] P909[3] P2000[3] P200[3] P2002[3] P2003[3] P2004[3] P250[3] P253[3] P255[3] P256[3] P257[3] P258[3] P259[3] P260[3] P26[3] P262[3] P263[3] P264[3] P265[3] P266[3] P267[3] P268[3] P270[3] P27[3] P272[3] P273[3] P274[3] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) T(wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode T(wait) for n-adaption to settle Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption Tn of Rs-adaption Tn of Xm-adaption Max. modulation Reverse output phase sequence Ctrl. word of motor data ident. Reference frequency Reference voltage Reference current Reference torque Reference power Hysteresis frequency f_hys Time-constant speed filter Threshold frequency f_ Delay time of threshold freq f_ Threshold frequency f_2 Delay time of threshold freq f_2 Threshold frequency f_3 Delay time of threshold freq f_3 Min. threshold for freq. setp. Hysteresis freq. for overspeed Entry freq. for perm. deviation Hysteresis frequency deviation Delay time permitted deviation Delay time ramp up completed Switch-off frequency f_off Delay time T_off Threshold current I_thresh Delay time current Threshold DC-link voltage Delay time DC-link voltage Torque threshold M_thresh P276[3] Delay time for torque threshold P277[3] Delay time for motor is blocked P278[3] Delay time for motor pulled out P28[3] Belt failure detection mode P282[3] Belt threshold frequency P283[3] Belt threshold frequency 2 P284[3] Belt threshold frequency 3 P285[3] Upper torque threshold P286[3] Lower torque threshold P287[3] Upper torque threshold 2 P288[3] Lower torque threshold 2 P289[3] Upper torque threshold 3 P290[3] Lower torque threshold 3 P292[3] Time delay for belt failure P220[3] Fixed PID setpoint P2202[3] Fixed PID setpoint 2 P2203[3] Fixed PID setpoint 3 P2204[3] Fixed PID setpoint 4 P2205[3] Fixed PID setpoint 5 P2206[3] Fixed PID setpoint 6 P2207[3] Fixed PID setpoint 7 P2208[3] Fixed PID setpoint 8 P2209[3] Fixed PID setpoint 9 P220[3] Fixed PID setpoint 0 P22[3] Fixed PID setpoint P222[3] Fixed PID setpoint 2 P223[3] Fixed PID setpoint 3 P224[3] Fixed PID setpoint 4 P225[3] Fixed PID setpoint 5 P223[3] Setpoint memory of PID-MOP P2240[3] Setpoint of PID-MOP P248[3] Gearbox ratio input P2482[3] Gearbox ratio output P2484[3] No. of shaft turns = Unit P2487[3] Positional error trim value P2488[3] Distance / No. of revolutions Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 5

16 .4 Binector Input.4 Binector Input P073[3] Function of digital output 0 P0732[3] Function of digital output P0733[3] Function of digital output 2 P0800[3] Download parameter set 0 P080[3] Download parameter set P080 CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) P08 CDS bit P0820 DDS bit 0 P082 DDS bit P0840[3] ON/OFF P0842[3] ON reverse/off P0844[3]. OFF2 P0845[3] 2. OFF2 P0848[3]. OFF3 P0849[3] 2. OFF3 P0852[3] Pulse enable P020[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 P02[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit P022[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 P023[3] Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 P035[3] Enable MOP (UP-command) P036[3] Enable MOP (DOWN-command) P055[3] Enable JOG right P056[3] Enable JOG left P074[3] Disable additional setpoint P0[3] Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint P3[3] Reverse P24[3] Enable JOG ramp times P40[3] RFG enable P4[3] RFG start P42[3] RFG enable setpoint P230[3] Enable DC braking P477[3] Set integrator of n-ctrl. P492[3] Enable droop P50[3] Change to torque control P203[3]. Faults acknowledgement P204[3] 2. Faults acknowledgement P206[3] External fault P2200[3] Enable PID controller P2220[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 P222[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit P2222[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 P2223[3] Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 P2235[3] Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) P2236[3] Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) P2480[3] Enable positioning ramp down P280[2] AND P282[2] AND 2 P284[2] AND 3 P286[2] OR P288[2] OR 2 P2820[2] OR 3 P2822[2] XOR P2824[2] XOR 2 P2826[2] XOR 3 P2828 NOT P2830 NOT 2 P2832 NOT 3 P2834[4] D-FF P2837[4] D-FF 2 P2840[2] RS-FF P2843[2] RS-FF 2 P2846[2] RS-FF 3 P2849 Timer P2854 Timer 2 P2859 Timer 3 P2864 Timer 4 6 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

17 .5 Connector Input.5 Connector Input P0095[0] P07[3] P076[3] P330[3] P478[3] P503[3] P5[3] P522[3] P523[3] P206[8] P209[8] P205[8] P2253[3] Display PZD signals Main setpoint scaling Additional setpoint scaling Voltage setpoint Set integrator value n-ctrl. Torque setpoint Additional torque setpoint Upper torque limit Lower torque limit PZD to USS on RS232 PZD to USS on RS485 (USS) PZD to CB PID setpoint P2254[3] PID trim source P2264[3] PID feedback P2869[2] ADD P287[2] ADD 2 P2873[2] SUB P2875[2] SUB 2 P2877[2] MUL P2879[2] MUL 2 P288[2] DIV P2883[2] DIV 2 P2885[2] CMP P2887[2] CMP 2.6 Binector Output r025 Fixed frequency status r2032 CtrlWrd from USS on RS232 r2033 CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS232 r2036 CtrlWrd from USS on RS485 (USS) r2037 CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS) r2090 Control word from CB r209 Control word 2 from CB r2225 PID Fixed frequency status r28 AND r283 AND 2 r285 AND 3 r287 OR r289 OR 2 r282 OR 3 r2823 XOR r2825 XOR 2 r2827 XOR 3 r2829 NOT r283 NOT 2 r2833 NOT 3 r2835 Q D-FF r2836 NOT-Q D-FF r2838 Q D-FF 2 r2839 NOT-Q D-FF 2 r284 Q RS-FF r2842 NOT-Q RS-FF r2844 Q RS-FF 2 r2845 NOT-Q RS-FF 2 r2847 Q RS-FF 3 r2848 NOT-Q RS-FF 3 r2852 Timer r2853 Nout timer r2857 Timer 2 r2858 Nout timer 2 r2862 Timer 3 r2863 Nout timer 3 r2867 Timer 4 r2868 Nout timer 4 r2886 CMP r2888 CMP 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 7

18 .7 Connector Output.7 Connector Output r0020 r002 r0024 r0025 r0026[2] r0027 r0029 r0030 r003 r0032 r0035[3] r0036 r0037[2] r0038 r0039 r005[2] r006 r0062 r0063 r0064 r0065 r0066 r0067 r0068 r0069[6] r0070 r007 r0072 r0074 r0075 r0076 r0077 r0078 r0079 r0080 r0084 r0085 r0086 r0090 Freq. setpoint before RFG Act. frequency Act. output frequency Act. output voltage Act. filtered DC-link volt. Act. output current Flux gen. current Torque gen. current Act. filtered torque Act. filtered power Act. motor temperature Inverter overload utilization Inverter temperature [ C] Act. power factor Energy consumpt. meter [kwh] Active Drive Dataset (DDS) Act. rotor speed Freq. setpoint Act. frequency Dev. frequency controller Slip frequency Act. output frequency Act. output current limit Output current Act. phase currents Act. DC-link voltage Max. output voltage Act. output voltage Act. modulation Current setpoint Isd Act. current Isd Current setpoint Isq Act. current Isq Torque setpoint (total) Act. torque Act. air gap flux Act. re-active current Act. active current Act. rotor angle r0394 Stator resistance IGBT [%] r0395 Total stator resistance [%] r0396 r0623[3] Act. rotor resistance Display for the identified stator resistance r0630[3] r063[3] r0632[3] r0633[3] r0755[2] r0947[64] r0949[64] r024 r050 r078 r079 r4 r9 r70 r242 r246[3] r35 r337 r343 r344 r438 r445 r482 r490 r508 r55 r58 P520[3] P52[3] r526 r527 r536 r537 r538 r539 P570[3] r583 r597 r598 r78 r79 r723 r724 r725 Motor model ambient temperature Stator iron temperature Stator winding temperature Rotor winding temperature Act. AI after scal. [4000h] Last fault code Fault value Act. fixed frequency Act. Output freq. of the MOP Total frequency setpoint Selected frequency setpoint Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl. Freq. setpoint before RFG Frequency setpoint after RFG Switch-on level of Vdc-max Switch-on level kin buffering Total boost voltage V/f slip frequency Imax controller freq. output Imax controller volt. output Freq. setpoint to controller Act. filtered frequency Integral output of n-ctrl. Droop frequency Torque setpoint Additional torque setpoint Acceleration torque Upper torque limit Lower torque limit Upper torque limitation Lower torque limitation Max. trq. motoring current Max trq regenerative current Upper torque limit (total) Lower torque limit (total) Fixed value flux setpoint Flux setpoint (smoothed) Outp. field weak. controller Flux setpoint (total) Output of Isq controller Integral output of Isq ctrl. Output of Isd controller Integral output of Isd ctrl. Integral limit of Isd ctrl. 8 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

19 .8 Connector/Binector Output r728 r746 r770 r77 r778 r782 r787 r80 r205[8] r208[8] r2050[8] r2059[5] r20[4] r23 r232 r269 r2224 r2250 r2260 r2262 Decoupling voltage Actual flux variance Prop. output of n-adaption Int. output of n-adaption Flux angle difference Output of Rs-adaptation Output of Xm-adaption Act. pulse frequency PZD from USS on RS232 PZD from USS on RS485 PZD from CB Displays SOL link stats for Sol Master. Warning number Last fault number code First fault number code Act. filtered frequency Act. fixed PID setpoint Output setpoint of PID-MOP PID setpoint after PID-RFG Filtered PID setp. after RFG r2266 PID filtered feedback r2272 PID scaled feedback r2273 PID error r2294 Act. PID output r2489 Remaining number of shaft revolutions r2870 ADD r2872 ADD 2 r2874 SUB r2876 SUB 2 r2878 MUL r2880 MUL 2 r2882 DIV r2884 DIV 2 P2889 Fixed setpoint in [%] P2890 Fixed setpoint 2 in [%] P3952[5] Memory value (integer) P3953 Memory value (float) P3999 Initial loading r4705 Displays status of trace func. r9660 SI remaining time until test stop.8 Connector/Binector Output r009 BOP control word r0050 Active Command Dataset r0052 Act. status word r0053 Act. status word 2 r0054 Act. control word r0055 Act. control word 2 r0056 Status of motor control r0403 Encoder status word r0722 Binary input values r0747 State of digital outputs r075 Status word of AI r0785 Status word of AO r407 Status 2 of motor control r75 Status word of motor model r297 Monitoring word r298 Monitoring word 2 r33 Fault Bit Array r977 SI hardware functions r9772 SI status word Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 9

20 .9 List of.9 List of 20 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

21 .9 List of r0000 Drive display / Drive display G20 Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the user selected output as defined in P0005. Pressing the "Fn" button for 2 seconds allows the user to view the values of DC link voltage, output frequency, output voltage, output current, and chosen r0000 setting (defined in P0005). r0002 Drive state / Drive state G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays actual drive state. Values: 0: Commissioning mode (P000!= 0) : Drive ready 2: Drive fault active 3: Drive starting (DC-link precharging) 4: Drive running 5: Stopping (ramping down) 6: Drive inhibited 7: Safety active 8: Safety reset/commissioning 9: Safety fault active Dependency: State 3 visible only while precharging DC link and when externally powered communications board is fitted. p0003 User access level / User access level G20 Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 4 Defines user access level to parameter sets. The default setting (standard) is sufficient for most simple applications. Values: 0: User defined parameter list - see P003 for details on use : Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters. 2: Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions 3: Expert: For expert use only. 4: Service: Only for use by authorized service personal - passwor p0004 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Parameter filter / Parameter filter Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Filters available parameters according to functionality to enable a more focussed approach to commissioning. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 2

22 .9 List of Values: 0: All parameters 2: Inverter 3: Motor 4: Speed sensor 5: Technol. application / units 7: Commands, binary I/O 8: AI and AO 0: Setpoint channel / RFG : Safety functions 2: Drive features 3: Motor control 20: Communication 2: Alarms / warnings / monitoring 22: Technology controller Example: P0004 = 2 specifies that only inverter parameters will be visible. P0004 = 22 specifies that only PID parameters will be visible. P0004 = 8 specifies that only AI parameters will be visible. p0004 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Parameter filter / Parameter filter Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Filters available parameters according to functionality to enable a more focussed approach to commissioning. Values: 0: All parameters 2: Inverter 3: Motor 4: Speed sensor 5: Technol. application / units 7: Commands, binary I/O 8: AI and AO 0: Setpoint channel / RFG 2: Drive features 3: Motor control 20: Communication 2: Alarms / warnings / monitoring 22: Technology controller Example: P0004 = 2 specifies that only inverter parameters will be visible. P0004 = 22 specifies that only PID parameters will be visible. P0004 = 8 specifies that only AI parameters will be visible. p0005[0...2] Display selection / Display selection G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Recommendation: Notice: Selects display for parameter r0000 (drive display). 2 Actual frequency 25 Output voltage 26 DC link voltage 27 Output current These settings refer to read only parameter numbers ("rxxxx"). 22 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

23 .9 List of See relevant "rxxxx" parameter descriptions. p0006 Display mode / Display mode G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Defines mode of display for r0000 (drive display). Values: 0: In Ready state alternate between setpoint and output frequency. : In Ready state display setpoint. In run display output frequenc 2: In Ready state alternate between P0005 value and r0020 value. I 3: In Ready state alternate between r0002 value and r0020 value. I 4: In all states just display P0005 When inverter is not running, the display alternates between the values for "Not Running" and "Running". Per default, the setpoint and actual frequency values are displayed alternately. p0007 Backlight delay time / Backl. delay time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Defines time period after which the backlight display turns off if no operator keys have been pressed. P0007 = 0: Backlight always on (default state). P0007 = : Number of seconds after which the backlight will turn off. p000 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Commissioning parameter / Commissioning par. Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected. Values: 0: Ready : Quick commissioning 2: Inverter 29: Download 30: Factory setting Dependency: Reset to 0 for inverter to run. P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 23

24 .9 List of P000 = The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P000 =. After that only the important parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after the other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900 = - 3. Afterward parameter P000 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically. P000 = 2 For service purposes only. P000 = 29 To transfer a parameter file via PC tool (e.g.: STARTER) parameter P000 will be set to 29 by the PC tool. When download has been finished PC tool resets parameter P000 to zero. P000 = 30 When resetting the parameters of inverter P000 must be set to 30. Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 =. The inverter will automatically reset all its parameters to their default settings. This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to start again. Duration of factory setting will take about 60 s. p000 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Commissioning parameter / Commissioning par. Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected. Values: 0: Ready : Quick commissioning 2: Inverter 29: Download 30: Factory setting 95: Safety commissioning (only on safety CU) Dependency: Reset to 0 for inverter to run. P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters. 24 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

25 .9 List of P000 = The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P000 =. After that only the important parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after the other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900 = - 3. Afterward parameter P000 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically. P000 = 2 For service purposes only. P000 = 29 To transfer a parameter file via PC tool (e.g.: STARTER) parameter P000 will be set to 29 by the PC tool. When download has been finished PC tool resets parameter P000 to zero. P000 = 30 When resetting the parameters of inverter P000 must be set to 30. Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 =. The inverter will automatically reset all its parameters to their default settings. This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to start again. Duration of factory setting will take about 60 s. P000 = 95 For changing the safety parameters select access level 3 and set the safety password. Only then P000 can be set to 95. The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 2 s. For finishing the safety commissioning, see P3900. p00 Lock for user defined parameter / LockUserDefinedPar G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T See parameter P003 (user defined parameter) p002 Key for user defined parameter / Key UserDefinedPar G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T See parameter P003 (user defined parameter). p003[0...9] User defined parameter / User-defined par G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user will have access. Instructions for use: Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 25

26 .9 List of Dependency:. Set P0003 = 3 (expert user). 2. Go to P003 indices 0 to 6 (user list) 3. Enter into P003 index 0 to 6 the parameters required to be visible in the user-defined list.the following values are fixed and cannot be changed: 4. Set P0003 = 0 to activate the user defined parameter. [0] = st user parameter [] = 2nd user parameter [2] = 3rd user parameter [3] = 4th user parameter [4] = 5th user parameter [5] = 6th user parameter [6] = 7th user parameter [7] = 8th user parameter [8] = 9th user parameter [9] = 0th user parameter [0] = th user parameter [] = 2th user parameter [2] = 3th user parameter [3] = 4th user parameter [4] = 5th user parameter [5] = 6th user parameter [6] = 7th user parameter [7] = 8th user parameter [8] = 9th user parameter [9] = 20th user parameter First, set P00 ("lock") to a different value than P002 ("key") to prevent changes to user-defined parameter. Then, set P0003 to 0 to activate the user-defined list. When locked and the user-defined parameter is activated, the only way to exit the user-defined parameter (and view other parameters) is to set P002 ("key") to the value in P00 ("lock"). Alternatively, set P000 = 30 (commissioning parameter filter = factory setting) and P0970 = (factory reset) to perform a complete factory reset. The default values of P00 ("lock") and P002 ("key") are the same. 5. With the BOP the parameter will always be stored in the EEPROM. 6. P004 itself will always be stored in the EEPROM. 7. P004 will not be changed by performing a factory reset (P000 = 30 and P097 = ). 8. P004 can be transferred during a DOWNLOAD (P000 = 29). 9. If "Store request via USS/CB = volatile (RAM)" and "P004[x] = volatile (RAM)", you can make a transfer of all parameter values into the nonvolatile memory via P If "Store request via USS/CB" and P004[x] are not consistent, the setting of P004[x] = "store nonvolatile (EEp004[0...2] Store mode / Store mode G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Sets the store mode for parameters. The store mode can be configured for all interfaces listed under "Index". Values: 0: Volatile (RAM) : Nonvolatile (EEPROM) [0] = USS on RS485 [] = reserved [2] = Fieldbus An independent store request may be part of the serial communications (e.g. PKE bits 5-2 of USS protocol), set by a PLC or PC tools like STARTER. See the table below for an influence on the settings of P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

27 .9 List of PROM)" has always higher priority. Store request via USS/CB EEPROM EEPROM RAM RAM Value ofp004[x] RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM Result EEPROM EEPROM RAM EEPROM r008 When transferring parameter p004, ET 200S FC uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. Firmware version / Firmware version G20 Access level: P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays version number of installed firmware. r009 CO/BO: BOP control word / BOP CtrlWd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of operator panel commands. The settings below are used as the "source" codes for keypad control when connecting to BICO input parameters. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 08 JOG right Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - When BICO technology is used to allocate functions to panel buttons, this parameter displays the actual status of the relevant command. The following functions can be "connected" to individual buttons: ON/OFF, OFF2, JOG, REVERSE, INCREASE, DECREASE The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual frequency setpoint (input from ramp function generator). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 27

28 .9 List of r002 CO: Act. frequency / Act. frequency G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual inverter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation. r0022 Act. filtered rotor speed / Act fil rotorspeed G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point r0024 CO: Act. output frequency / Act.outp. freq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual output frequency (slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation are included). r0025 CO: Act. output voltage / Act.outp. volt G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays [rms] voltage applied to motor. r0026[0...] CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. / Act. fil. Vdc G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays DC-link voltage. [0] = Compensation DC voltage Channel [] = Measurement/Monitoring DC voltage Channel r0027 CO: Act. output current / Act. outp. cur G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays rms value of motor current [A]. r0029 CO: Flux gen. current / Flux gen. cur. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays flux-generating current component. The flux-generating current component is based on the nominal flux, which is calculated from the motor parameters (P Calculation of motor parameters). Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. The flux-generating current component is generally constant up to the base speed of the motor; above base speed, this component is weakened (field weakening) thus enabling an increase in motor speed but at reduced torque. r0030 CO: Torque gen. current / Torque gen.cur G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays torque-generating current component. The torque-generating current component is calculated from the torque setpoint values delivered by the speed regulator. Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. 28 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

29 .9 List of For asynchronous motors, a limit is calculated for the torque generating current component (in conjunction with the maximum possible output voltage (r007), motor leakage and current field weakening (r0377)) and this prevents motor stalling. r003 CO: Act. filtered torque / Act fil torque G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays electrical torque. Output value will be zero at low speeds when current injection is active (r75.4 = ). The electrical torque is not the same as the mechanical torque, which can be measured on the shaft. Due to windage and friction a part of the electrical torque is lost in the motor. r0032 CO: Act. filtered power / Act fil. power G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays motor power. Dependency: Store request via USS/CB Value ofp004[x] Result EEPROM RAM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM RAM RAM RAM RAM EEPROM EEPROM Value is displayed in [kw] or [hp] depending on setting for P000 (operation for Europe / North America). r0035[0...2] CO: Act. motor temperature / Act. mot.temp. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays measured motor temperature. r0036 CO: Inverter overload utilization / Invert ovl util G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point r0037[0...] CO: Inverter temperature [ C] / Inverter temp. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays measured heatsink temperature and calculated junction temperature of IGBTs based on thermal model. [0] = Measured heat sink temperature [] = Total Chip Junction Temperature [2] = Rectifier temperature [3] = Inverter ambient temperature [4] = Control board temperature r0038 CO: Act. power factor / Act.power fact G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays actual power factor. Applies when V/f control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value one. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 29

30 .9 List of r0039 CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kwh] / Energy meter G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays electrical energy used by inverter since display was last reset (see P reset energy consumption meter). Value is reset when P0040 = reset energy consumption meter. p0040 Reset energy consumption meter / Reset energy meter G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Resets value of parameter r0039 (energy consumption meter) to zero. Values: 0: No reset : Reset r0039 to 0 Dependency: No reset until "P" is pressed. r0050 CO/BO: Active Command Dataset / Active CDS G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays currently selected and active Command Dataset (CDS). Values: 0: Command Dataset 0 (CDS) : Command Dataset (CDS) 2: Command Dataset 2 (CDS) See parameter P080. r005[0...] CO: Active Drive Dataset (DDS) / Active DDS G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays currently selected and active Drive Dataset (DDS). Values: 0: Drive Dataset 0 (DDS0) : Drive Dataset (DDS) 2: Drive Dataset 2 (DDS2) [0] = Selected Drive Dataset [] = Active Drive Dataset See parameter P0820. r0052 CO/BO: Act. status word / Act StatWd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays first active status word of inverter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose inverter status. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Drive ready Yes No - 0 Drive ready to run Yes No - 02 Drive running Yes No - 03 Drive fault active Yes No - 04 OFF2 active No Yes - 05 OFF3 active No Yes - 30 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

31 .9 List of 06 ON inhibit active Yes No - 07 Drive warning active Yes No - 08 Deviation setpoint / act. value No Yes - 09 PZD control Yes No - 0 f_act >= P082 (f_max) Yes No - Warning: Motor current/torque limit No Yes - 2 Brake active Yes No - 3 Motor overload No Yes - 4 Motor runs right Yes No - 5 Inverter overload No Yes - Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 3

32 .9 List of Dependency: r0052 Bit00 - Bit02: State-sequence diagram after Power On or ON/OFF respectively: ==> see below Power ON 0 Drive ready r0052 Bit00 0 ON/OFF 0 Pre-charging active 0 Drive ready to run r0052 Bit0 0 Pulse enable 0 Drive running r0052 Bit02 0 Ramping finished r0053 Bit09 0 t t t t t t t t r0052 Bit03 "Drive fault active": Output of Bit3 (Fault) will be inverted on digital output (Low = Fault, High = No Fault). r0052 Bit08 "Deviation setpoint / act. value" ==> see parameter P264 r0052 Bit0 "f_act >= P082 (f_max)" ==> see parameter P082 r0052 Bit2 "Motor holding brake active" ==> see parameter P25 32 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

33 .9 List of r0052 Bit4 "Motor runs right" ==> see below ON/OFF r0054 Bit00 Reverse r0054 Bit ON t t f act 0 t Drive running r0052 Bit02 Motor runs right r0052 Bit4 left not defined last state is displayed t t The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0053 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 / Act StatWd2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays second status word of inverter (in bit format). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 DC brake active Yes No - 0 f_act > P267 (f_off) Yes No - 02 f_act > P080 (f_min) Yes No - 03 Act. current r0027 >= P270 Yes No - 04 f_act > P255 (f_) Yes No - 05 f_act <= P255 (f_) Yes No - 06 f_act >= setpoint (f_set) Yes No - 07 Vdc_act r0026< P272 Yes No - 08 Vdc_act r0026 > P272 Yes No - 09 Ramping finished Yes No - 0 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) Yes No - PID output r2294 == P229 (PID_max) Yes No - 4 Download Dataset 0 from AOP Yes No - 5 Download Dataset from AOP Yes No - Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 33

34 .9 List of Notice: r0053 Bit0 "f_act > P267 (f_off)" ==> see parameter P267 r0053 Bit02 "f_act > P080 (f_min)" ==> see parameter P080 r0053 Bit03 "Act. current r0027 >= P270" ==> see parameter P270 r0053 Bit04 "f_act > P255 (f_)" ==> see parameter P255 r0053 Bit05 "f_act <= P255 (f_)" ==> see parameter P255 r0053 Bit06 "f_act >= setpoint (f_set)" ==> see parameter P250 r0053 Bit09 "Ramping finished" ==> see below ON OFF f f set t f act t Ramping finished r0053 Bit09 0 t The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0054 CO/BO: Act. control word / Act CtrlWd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays first control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes - 03 Pulse enable Yes No - 04 RFG enable Yes No - 05 RFG start Yes No - 06 Setpoint enable Yes No - 07 Fault acknowledge Yes No - 08 JOG right Yes No - 09 JOG left Yes No - 0 Control from PLC Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - 5 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No - Notice: r0054 is identical to r2036 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P079. The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0055 CO/BO: Act. control word 2 / Act CtrlWd2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays additional control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active. 34 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

35 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No - 0 Fixed frequency Bit Yes No - 02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No - 03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No - 04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No - 05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit Yes No - 08 Enable PID Yes No - 09 Enable DC brake Yes No - Enable Droop Yes No - 2 Torque control Yes No - 3 External fault No Yes - 5 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit Yes No - Notice: r0055 is identical to r2037 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P079. The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0056 CO/BO: Status of motor control / CO/BO:Stat MotCtrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of motor control (in bit format), which can be used to diagnose inverter status. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Init. control finished Yes No - 0 Motor demagnetizing finished Yes No - 02 Pulses enabled Yes No - 03 Voltage soft start select Yes No - 04 Motor excitation finished Yes No - 05 Starting boost active Yes No - 06 Acceleration boost active Yes No - 07 Frequency is negative Yes No - 08 Field weakening active Yes No - 09 Volts setpoint limited Yes No - 0 Slip frequency limited Yes No - F_out > F_max Freq. limited Yes No - 2 Phase reversal selected Yes No - 3 Imax controller active/torque limit reached Yes No - 4 Vdc-max controller active Yes No - 5 KIB (Vdc-min control) active Yes No - Notice: The I-max controller (r0056 Bit3) will be activated when the actual output current (r0027) exceeds the current limit in r0067. See description of seven-segment display given in the introduction. r006 CO: Act. rotor speed / Act rotor speed G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays current speed detected by encoder. r0062 CO: Freq. setpoint / Freq. setpoint G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays speed setpoint of vector controller. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 35

36 .9 List of r0063 CO: Act. frequency / Act. frequency G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual speed. Act. frequencies: 60 r033 Act. filtered speed V/f 60 ms r0022 P300 Act. filtered frequency r002 SLVC (Observer model) Encoder r P P0400 0,2,2 <20 20, 22 2, 23 Act. frequency r0063 Act. encoder frequency r006 P300 = 2,23 and P0400 = 0 --> F0090 r0064 CO: Dev. frequency controller / Dev. freq ctrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays actual deviation of speed controller. This value is calculated from the speed setpoint (r0062) and the actual speed (r0063). Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. r0065 CO: Slip frequency / Slip frequency G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays slip frequency of motor in [%] relative to the rated motor frequency (P030). For V/f control, see also P335 (slip compensation). r0066 CO: Act. output frequency / Act. outp freq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual output frequency. The output frequency is limited by the values entered in P080 (min. frequency) and P082 (max. frequency). 36 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

37 .9 List of r0067 CO: Act. output current limit / Outp cur limit G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays valid maximum output current of inverter. Parameter r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors: Rated motor current P0305 Motor overload factor P0640 Motor protection in dependency of P060 r0067 is less than or equal to maximum inverter current r0209 Inverter protection in dependency of P0290 p0305 Motor Inverter p0640 Motor protection r0209 Inverter protection Min r0067 A reduction of r0067 may indicate an inverter overload or a motor overload. r0068 CO: Output current / Output current G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays unfiltered [rms] value of motor current [A]. Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0027 (output current), which is filtered and is used to display the value on the BOP/AOP). r0069[0...5] CO: Act. phase currents / Act. phase cur G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays phase currents. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase [3] = Offset U_phase [4] = Offset V_phase [5] = Offset W_phase r0070 CO: Act. DC-link voltage / Act. Vdc G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays (unfiltered) DC-link voltage. Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0026 (actual DC-link voltage), which is filtered and is used to display the value on the BOP/AOP). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 37

38 .9 List of r007 CO: Max. output voltage / Max. outp.volt G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays maximum output voltage. r007 V max (Inverter) p0304 V n V (Motor) V max = f(v dc,mod max) V out (Inverter) p030 f n (Motor) f P, Φ Power Flux ~ f Field weakening f Dependency: Actual maximum output voltage depends on the actual input supply voltage. r0072 CO: Act. output voltage / Act. outp.volt G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays output voltage. r0074 CO: Act. modulation / Act modulation G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual modulation index. r0075 The modulation index is defined as ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental component in the inverter phase output voltage and half of the dc-link voltage. CO: Current setpoint Isd / Cur. setp. Isd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays setpoint of flux generating current component. Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. 38 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

39 .9 List of r0076 CO: Act. current Isd / Act. cur. Isd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays flux generating current component. Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. r0077 CO: Current setpoint Isq / Cur. setp. Isq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point r0078 CO: Act. current Isq / Act. cur. Isq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays component of torque generating current. r0079 CO: Torque setpoint (total) / Total trq setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays total torque setpoint. Applies when vector control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. r0080 CO: Act. torque / Act. torque G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual torque. Output value will be zero at low speeds when current injection is active (r75.4 = ). r0084 CO: Act. air gap flux / Air gap flux G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays air gap flux in [%] relative to the rated motor flux. r0085 CO: Act. re-active current / Act.re-active cur G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point r0086 CO: Act. active current / Act.active cur G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays active (real part) of motor current. Applies when V/f control is selected in P300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero. r0090 CO: Act. rotor angle / Act rotor angle G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Indicates the current angle of the rotor. This function is not available on single input channel encoders. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 39

40 .9 List of p0095[0...9] CI: Display PZD signals / PZD signals G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects source of display for PZD signals. [0] = st PZD signal [] = 2nd PZD signal [2] = 3rd PZD signal [3] = 4th PZD signal [4] = 5th PZD signal [5] = 6th PZD signal [6] = 7th PZD signal [7] = 8th PZD signal [8] = 9th PZD signal [9] = 0th PZD signal r0096[0...9] PZD signals / PZD signals G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays PZD signals in [%]. [0] = st PZD signal [] = 2nd PZD signal [2] = 3rd PZD signal [3] = 4th PZD signal [4] = 5th PZD signal [5] = 6th PZD signal [6] = 7th PZD signal [7] = 8th PZD signal [8] = 9th PZD signal [9] = 0th PZD signal R0096 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex. p000 Europe / North America / Europe / Nth Amer. G20 Access level: P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() Determines whether power settings are expressed in [kw] or [hp] (e.g. Rated motor power P0307). The default settings for the rated motor frequency P030 and maximum frequency P082 are also set automatically here, in addition to reference frequency P2000. Values: 0: Europe [kw], motor base frequency is 50 Hz : North America [hp], motor base frequency is 60 Hz 2: North America [kw], motor base frequency is 60 Hz Dependency: Where: Stop drive first (i.e. disable all pulses) before you change this parameter. Parameter P000 can only be changed with P000 = (Commissioning mode) via the respective interface (e.g. USS on RS232). Changing P000 resets all rated motor parameters as well as other parameters that depend on the rated motor parameters (see P calculation of motor parameters). 40 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

41 .9 List of r09[0...2] Configuration Control Unit / Config CU G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Displays the actual HW-configuration of the Control Unit [0] = SZL Vector CU and PM combined [] = SZL Vector CU [2] = SZL Vector PM p099 Equipment system number / Equip. system no. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T Equipment system number. This parameter has no operation effect. p020[0...2] Act. power stack code number / Act.Pstack code no G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Notice: Identifies hardware variant as shown in table below. [0] = Powerstack code [] = Functionality version - Last Digit of MLFB [2] = Last used PS Id Parameter P020 = 0 indicates that no power stack has been identified. r0203 Act. inverter type / Act. inverter type G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Type number of actual inverter identified. Values: 0: No PS Data/Module : MICROMASTER 420 2: MICROMASTER 440 3: MICRO- / COMBIMASTER 4 4: MICROMASTER 40 5: reserved 6: MICROMASTER 440 PX 7: MICROMASTER 430 0: SINAMICS G0 : SINAMICS IPM25 4: SINAMICS PM240 5: SINAMICS PM250 r0204 Power stack features / Pstack features G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned32 Displays hardware features of power stack. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 4

42 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 DC input voltage Yes No - 0 RFI filter Yes No - 02 F3E Powerstack Yes No - Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power stack has been identified. p0205 Inverter application / Inverter appl. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0 0 Selects inverter application. The inverter and motor requirements are determined by the speed range and torque requirements of the load. The relationship between speed and torque for different loads (constant torque loads or variable torque loads). Constant torque (CT): CT is used if the application needs a constant torque on the whole frequency range. Many loads can be considered to be constant torque loads. Typical constant torque loads are conveyors, compressors and positve displacement pumps (see diagram). Variable torque (VT): VT is used if the application has a parabolic frequency-torque characteristic like many fans and pumps. Variable torque allows with the same inverter: Higher rated inverter current r0207 Higher rated inverter power r0206 Higher threshold for I2t protection If P0205 is modified in quick commissioning it immediately calculates various motor parameters:. P0305 Rated motor current 2. P0307 Rated motor power 42 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

43 .9 List of 3. P0640 Motor overload factor Torque Power Characteristic M ~ f M = const. M ~ f M ~ f 2 p = const. p ~ f p ~ f 2 p ~ f 3 P M M P M P M P f f f f Application Winders Facing lathes Rotary cutting machines Hoisting gear Belt conveyors Process machines Involving forming Rolling mills Planers Compressors Calenders with viscous friction Eddy-current brakes Pumps Fans Centrifuges It is recommended to modify P0205 first. Afterwards motor parameter may be adapted. Motor parameter will be overridden by changing this sequence. User p0205 Inverter parameters r0207 I I, n r0208 P I, n r0209 I I, max Motor parameters p0305 I M,n p0307 P M,n p0640 I M,max Technology parameter p0500 p0500 Control parameter p300 p300 Values: 0: Constant torque : Variable torque Notice: Use setting (variable torque) only for variable-torque applications (e.g. pumps and fans). If used for constant-load applications, I2t warning will be produced too late, causing overheating in the motor. The parameter value is not reset by the factory setting (see P0970). To set P0205 = (variable torque) is not possible for all inverters. r0206 Rated inverter power [kw] / [hp] / Rated power[kw/hp] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays nominal rated motor power from inverter. Value is displayed in [kw] or [hp] depending on setting for P000 (operation for Europe / North America). r0206 [hp] = 0.75 r0206 [kw] Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 43

44 .9 List of r0207[0...2] Rated inverter current / Rated inverter cur G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays rated inverter current. [0] = Rated inverter current [] = Rated VT current [2] = Rated CT current The rated VT current r0207[] and rated CT current r0207[2] displays the suitable 4-pole Siemens standard motor (IEC) for the selected load cycle (see diagram). The parameters r0207[], r0207[2] are the default value of P0305 in association with the CT/VT application (load cycle). If r0207[] = r0207[2], than no differentiation is possible between CT/VT applications. Inverter current/power % r % r0207[0] 00 % 85 % Rated inverter current (continuous) Base load current (with overload capability ) Short-time current 60 s 300 s t r0208 Rated inverter voltage / Rated voltage G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned32 Displays nominal AC supply voltage of inverter. r0208 = 230 : V +/- 0 % r0208 = 400 : V +/- 0 % r0208 = 575 : V +/- 0 % r0209 Maximum inverter current / Max. inverter cur G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays maximum output current of inverter. Parameter r0209 depends on the derating which is affected by pulse frequency P800, ambient temperature and altitude. The data of deration is given in the Operating Instructions. 44 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

45 .9 List of p020 Supply voltage / Supply voltage G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 [] 000 [] 400 Parameter P020 defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon the type of inverter. If P020 does not correspond to the supply voltage, then it must be modified. Dependency: When P020 has been modified, the following thresholds are changed: Optimizes Vdc controller, which extends the ramp-down time if regenerative energy from motor would otherwise cause DC link overvoltage trips. Reducing the value enables controller to cut in earlier and reduce the risk of overvoltage. Set P254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 0. Cut-in levels for Vdc-controller and compound braking are then derived directly from P020 (supply voltage). Vdc_min switch -on level Vdc_max switch -on level Compound braking switch-on level Dynamic braking switch-on level = p245 2 p020 =.5 2 p020 =.3 2 p020 =.3 2 p020 r023[0...] Max. cable length / Max. cable length G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Notice: Indexed parameter to display maximum allowable cable length between inverter and motor. [0] = Max. allowed unscreened cable length [] = Max. allowed screened cable length For full EMC compliance, the screened cable must not exceed 25 m in length when an EMC filter is fitted. p0290 Inverter overload reaction / Overload reaction G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects reaction of inverter to an internal over-temperature. Values: 0: Reduce output frequency : Trip (F0004) 2: Reduce pulse frequency and output frequency 3: Reduce pulse frequency then trip (F0004) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 45

46 .9 List of Dependency: Following physical values influence the inverter overload protection (see diagram): heat sink temperature junction temperature (IGBT temperature) inverter I2t Inverter monitoring Inverter overload reaction p0290 r0036 r0037 i 2 t p0294 Heat sink temperature p0292 IGBT temperature p0292 i_max control (U/f) Current control (SLVC, VC) f_pulse control A0504 A0505 A0506 F0004 F0005 Notice: P0290 = 0, 2: Reduction of output frequency is only effective if the load is also reduced.this is for example valid for variable torque applications with a quadratic torque characteristic as pumps or fans. For settings P0290 = 0 or 2, the I-max controller will act upon the output current limit (r0067) in case of overtemperature. P0290 = 2, 3: The pulse frequency P800 is reduced only if higher than 2 khz and if the operating frequency is below 2Hz. The actual pulse frequency is displayed in parameter r80. A trip will always result, if the action taken does not sufficiently reduce internal temperature. p029[0...2] Inverter protection / Inverter protect. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T bin Bit 00 for enabling/disabling automatic pulse frequency reduction at output frequencies below 2 Hz. The benefit is to reduce the noises at frequencies below 2 Hz. Bit 02 shows if phase loss detection (input phase) of 3 phase inverters is enabled after factory reset. Default setting of phase loss is disabled for FSA - FSC. FSD and greater it is enabled. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 0 reserved Yes No - 02 Phase loss detection enable Yes No - See P0290 (inverter overload reaction) 46 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

47 .9 List of p0292 Inverter temperature warning / Inv. temp. warn. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 25 [] 5 Defines the temperature difference (in C) between the Overtemperature trip threshold (F0004) and the warning threshold (A0504) of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be changed by the user. p0294 Inverter I2t warning / Inv. I2t warn. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 00.0 [] 95.0 p0295 Inverter fan off delay time / Fan off delay time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 3600 [] 0 Defines inverter fan switch off delay time in seconds after drive has stopped. Setting to 0, inverter fan will switch off when the drive stops, that is no delay. p0300[0...2] Select motor type / Select motor type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 2 Selects motor type. This parameter is required during commissioning to select motor type and optimize inverter performance. Most motors are asynchronous; if in doubt, use the formula below. x = p p03 x =, 2,..., n : Synchronous motor x, 2,..., n : Asynchronous motor If the result is a whole number, the motor is synchronous. Values: : Asynchronous rotational motor 2: Synchronous rotational motor Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 47

48 .9 List of Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). If synchronous motor is selected, the following functions are not available: P0308 Power factor P0309 Motor efficiency P0346 Magnetization time P0347 Demagnetization time P335 Slip compensation P336 Slip limit P0320 Motor magnetizing current P0330 Rated motor slip P033 Rated magnetization current P0332 Rated power factor P0384 Rotor time constant P200, P202, P203 Flying start 48 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

49 .9 List of p0304[0...2] Rated motor voltage / Rated mot. voltage G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0 [] 2000 [] 400 Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating plate. Following diagram shows a typical rating plate with the locations of the relevant motor data. P030 P0305 P0304 3~Mot EN LA730-4AA0 No UD TICI F 325 IP 55 IM B3 50 Hz 230/400 V /Υ 60 Hz 460 V P kW 9.7/.A 6.5kW 0.9 A Cos ϕ /min Cos ϕ /min /Υ / V Υ % /.4-.9 A.-.3 A 45kg P0308 P03 P0309 Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 49

50 .9 List of Caution: The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star / delta). This means, if delta wiring is used for the motor, delta rating plate data has to be entered. I I N I U 2 U N Z N U 2 Z Z 2 3 Z Z 2 3 I 2 Z I = I2 = I3 U U I = U = U = 3 U = 3 Z Ν I, = U 2, = Z 2, = I 3, Y U 3 Z 3 2,Y 2, Y I2 = I23 = I3 = I 3 U2 = U23 = U3 U I 2 = Z 3 Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. p0305[0...2] Safety Integrated: If driving loads occur in the application, the motor must be dimensioned so that its slip in supersynchronous operation always remains within the rated slip. Nominal motor current [A] from rating plate - see diagram in P0304. Dependency: Rated motor current / Rated mot. current G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0.0 [] [].86 Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Depends also on P0320 (motor magnetization current). 50 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

51 .9 List of The maximum value of P0305 depends on the maximum inverter current r0209 and the motor type: Asynchronous motor : p0305max, asyn = 2 r0209 Synchronous motor : p0305max, syn= 2 r0209 It is recommended that the ratio of P0305 (rated motor current) and r0207 (rated inverter current) should not be lower than: U/f : SLVC and VC : 8 4 P0305 r0207 P0305 r0207 When the relation of the nominal motor current P0305 and half of the maximal inverter current (r0209) exceeds,5 an additional current derating is applied. This is necessary to protect the inverter from harmonic current waves. I max,inv r r P0305 r0209 p0307[0...2] Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. Rated motor power / Rated motor power G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() Dependency: Nominal motor power [kw/hp] from rating plate. If P000 =, values will be in [hp] - see diagram P0304 (rating plate). Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. p0308[0...2] Rated motor cosphi / Rated mot. cosphi G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() Nominal motor power factor (cosphi) from rating plate - see diagram P0304. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 5

52 .9 List of Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Visible only when P000 = 0 or 2, (motor power entered in [kw]). Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. p0309[0...2] Rated motor efficiency / Rated efficiency G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0.0 [] 99.9 [] 0.0 Dependency: Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate. Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Visible only when P000 =, (i.e. motor power entered in [hp]). Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. See diagram in P0304 (rating plate). P0309 = 00 % corresponds to superconducting. p030[0...2] Rated motor frequency / Rated motor freq. G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 2.00 [] [] Dependency: Nominal motor frequency [Hz] from rating plate. Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed. See diagram in P0304 (rating plate) p03[0...2] Rated motor speed / Rated motor speed G20 Access level: P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0 [] [] 395 Nominal motor speed [rpm] from rating plate. 52 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

53 .9 List of Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. Required for vector control and V/f control with speed controller. Slip compensation in V/f control requires rated motor speed for correct operation. Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed. See diagram in P0304 (rating plate) Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. r033[0...2] Motor pole pairs / Motor pole pairs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned8 Dependency: Displays number of motor pole pairs that the inverter is currently using for internal calculations. Recalculated automatically when P030 (rated motor frequency) or P03 (rated motor speed) is changed. r033 = 60 p030 p03 r033 = : 2-pole motor r033 = 2 : 4-pole motor etc. p034[0...2] Motor pole pair number / Motor pole pair no G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned8 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() Dependency: Specifies number of pole pairs of motor. Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning). Setting 0 causes r033 (calculated motor pole pairs) to be used during operation. Setting to > 0 overrides r033. P034 = : 2-pole motor P034 = 2 : 4-pole motor etc. p0320[0...2] Motor magnetizing current / Motor magnet. cur. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T 0.0 [] 99.0 [] 0.0 Defines motor magnetization current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 53

54 .9 List of Dependency: P0320 = 0: Setting 0 causes calculation by P0340 = (data entered from rating plate) or by P3900 = - 3 (end of quick commissioning). The calculated value is displayed in parameter r033. r0330[0...2] Rated motor slip / Rated motor slip G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays nominal motor slip in [%] relative to P030 (rated motor frequency) and P03 (rated motor speed). p03 p030 r033 r0330 [%] = % p030 r033[0...2] Rated magnetization current / Rated magnet. cur. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays calculated magnetizing current of motor in [A]. r0332[0...2] Rated power factor / Rated power factor G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays power factor for motor Value is calculated internally if P0308 (rated motor cosphi) set to 0; otherwise, value entered in P0308 is displayed. r0333[0...2] Rated motor torque / Rated motor torque G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Displays rated motor torque. Value is calculated from P0307 (rated motor power) and P03 (rated motor speed). p0307[kw] 000 r0333[nm] = p03[/ min] 2π Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

55 .9 List of p0335[0...2] Motor cooling / Motor cooling G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects motor cooling system used. Values: 0: Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor : Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan 2: Self-cooled and internal fan 3: Force-cooled and internal fan Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 55

56 .9 List of p0340[0...2] Calculation of motor parameters / Calc of mot.params G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Calculates various motor parameters (see table below): P034[3] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] P0342[3] Total/motor inertia ratio P0344[3] Motor weight P0346[3] Magnetization time P0347[3] Demagnetization time P0350[3] Stator resistance (line-to-line) P0352[3] Cable resistance P0354[3] Rotor resistance P0356[3] Stator leakage inductance P0358[3] Rotor leakage inductance P0360[3] Main inductance P0362[3] Magnetizing curve flux P0363[3] Magnetizing curve flux 2 P0364[3] Magnetizing curve flux 3 P0365[3] Magnetizing curve flux 4 P0366[3] Magnetizing curve imag P0367[3] Magnetizing curve imag 2 P0368[3] Magnetizing curve imag 3 P0369[3] Magnetizing curve imag 4 P0625[3] Ambient motor temperature P36[3] Boost end frequency P460[3] Gain speed controller P462[3] Integral time speed controller P470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) P472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) P520[3] CO: Upper torque limit P52[3] CO: Lower torque limit P530[3] Motoring power limitation P53[3] Regenerative power limitation P75[3] Gain current controller P77[3] Integral time current controller P764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) P767[3] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) P2000[3] Reference frequency P2002[3] Reference current P2003[3] Reference torque P274[3] Torque threshold M_thresh P285[3] Upper torque threshold P286[3] Lower torque threshold P287[3] Upper torque threshold 2 P288[3] Lower torque threshold 2 P289[3] Upper torque threshold 3 P290[3] Lower torque threshold 3 P0340 = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x P0340 = 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x P0340 = 3 P0340 = 4 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 56 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

57 .9 List of Values: 0: No calculation : Complete parameterization 2: Calculation of equivalent circuit data 3: Calculation of V/f and vector control data 4: Calculation of controller settings only This parameter is required during commissioning to optimize inverter performance. If there is a large mismatch in Power ratings of Inverter to Motor it is possible that r0384 and r0386 may not be calculated correct. In these cases use P90. When transferring parameter p0340, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. p034[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] / Inertia [kg*m^2] G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets no-load inertia of motor. Together with P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) and P496 (scaling factor acceleration), this value produces the acceleration torque (r57), which can be added to any additional torque produced from a BICO source (P5), and incorporated in the torque control function. The result of P034 * P0342 is included in the speed controller calculation. P034 * P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) = total motor inertia P496 (scaling factor acceleration) = 00 % activates acceleration pre-control for the speed controller and calculates the torque from P034 (motor inertia) and P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor). p0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio / Tot/mot inert.rat. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Specifies ratio between total inertia (load + motor) and motor inertia. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 57

58 .9 List of p0344[0...2] Motor weight / Motor weight G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T.0 [] [] 9.4 Specifies motor weight [kg]. This value is used in the motor thermal model. It is normally calculated automatically from P0340 (motor parameters) but can also be entered manually. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. r0345[0...2] Motor start-up time / Mot. start-up time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays motor start-up time. This time corresponds to the standardized motor inertia. The start-up time is the time taken to reach rated motor speed from standstill at acceleration with rated motor torque (r0333). p0346[0...2] Magnetization time / Magnetization time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [].000 Sets magnetization time [s], i.e. waiting time between pulse enable and start of ramp-up. Motor magnetization builds up during this time. Notice: Magnetization time is normally calculated automatically from the motor data and corresponds to the rotor time constant. An excessive reduction of this time can result in insufficient motor magnetization. If boost settings are higher than 00 %, magnetization time may be reduced. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. p0347[0...2] Demagnetization time / Demagnet. time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [].000 Changes time allowed after OFF2 / fault condition, before pulses can be re-enabled. 58 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

59 .9 List of Notice: Not active following a normally completed ramp-down, e.g. after OFF, OFF3 or JOG. Overcurrent trips will occur if the time is decreased excessively. The demagnetization time is approximately 2.5 x rotor time constant in seconds. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. p0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line) / Stator res. (L) G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Stator resistance value in [Ohms] for connected motor (line value). The parameter value doesn't include the cable resistance. There are three ways to determine the value for this parameter: 4. Calculate using P0340 = (data entered from rating plate) or P000 =, P3900 =,2 or 3 (end of quick commissioning). Since the manually measured resistor is a line-to-line value, which includes the cable resistors, the measured value has to be divided by two and the cable resistor of a line has to be subtracted from that value. The value entered in P0350 (stator resistance) is the one obtained by the method last used. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. p0352[0...2] Cable resistance / Cable resistance G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 20.0 [] 0.0 Describes cable resistance between inverter and motor for one phase. The value corresponds to the resistance of the cable between the inverter and the motor, relative to the rated impedance. p0354[0...2] Rotor resistance / Rotor resistance G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Sets rotor resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 59

60 .9 List of Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P90 (motor identification). p0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance / Stator leak.induct G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Dependency: Sets stator leakage inductance [mh] of motor equivalent circuit (phase value). Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P90 (motor identification). p0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance / Rotor leak.induct. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Dependency: Sets rotor leakage inductance [mh] of motor equivalent circuit (phase value). Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P90 (motor identification). 60 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

61 .9 List of p0360[0...2] Main inductance / Main inductance G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets main inductance [mh] of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value), see diagram below. T-equivalent circuit : On-state voltage [V] P825 (.4) Inverter Gating dead time [us] P828 (0.50) Cable Cable resistance [Ohm] P0352.D (0.0) Stator res. (L2L) [Ohm] P0350.D ( ) P0350 = 2(R Cable + RS) Stator leak.induct P0356.D ( ) Motor Rotor leak.induct P0358.D (0.0) Rotor resistance [Ohm] P0354.D (0.0) i S i R R Cable R S L σ S i µ L σr R R C Cable Main inductance P0360.D (0.0) L m L S = L σs + L m L R = L σr + L m Invers - Γ - equivalent circuit : Cable res. [%] r0372.d Stator res. [%] r0370.d Tot.leak.react. [%] r0377.d Rotor res. [%] r0374.d i S i RΓ R Cable R S X σ i µγ (r033) R RΓ C Cable X mγ Main reactance [%] r0382.d Dependency: Caution: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P90 (motor identification). The data of equivalent circuit relates to the star equivalent circuit. Any data of the delta equivalent circuit available, therefore must be transformed to the star equivalent circuit before entering into the inverter. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 6

62 .9 List of p0362[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux / Magnet.curve flux G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 60.0 Specifies first flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304). The parameter settings for the values of P0362 to P0365 respectively P0366 to P0369 are illustrated in the diagram below. Φ [%] p0365 p % p0363 p p0366 p % p0368 p0369 i µ [%] iµ [%] = iµ [A] r033 Notice: The value belongs to the first magnetizing current value and must be smaller than or equal to magnetizing curve flux 2 (P0363). If the magnetization values entered in P0362 to P0365 respectively P0366 to P0369 do not match the conditions (see below), a linear characteristic is applied internally. P0365 P0364 P0363 P0362 P0369 P0368 P0367 P0366 P0362 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor flux p0363[0...2] Rated flux = rated EMF Magnetizing curve flux 2 / Magnet.curve flux2 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 85.0 Specifies second flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304). 62 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

63 .9 List of Notice: The value belongs to the second magnetizing current value and must be smaller than or equal to magnetizing curve flux 3 (P0364) and greater than or equal to magnetizing curve flux (P0362). P0363 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor flux Rated flux = rated EMF p0364[0...2] See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). Magnetizing curve flux 3 / Magnet.curve flux3 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 5.0 Notice: Specifies third flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304). The value belongs to the third magnetizing current value and must be smaller than or equal to magnetizing curve flux 4 (P0365) and greater than or equal to magnetizing curve flux 2 (P0363). P0364 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor flux Rated flux = rated EMF See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). p0365[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 4 / Magnet.curve flux4 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 25.0 Notice: Specifies fourth flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304). The value belongs to the third magnetizing current value and must be greater than or equal to magnetizing curve flux 3 (P0364). P0365 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor flux Rated flux = rated EMF See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). p0366[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag / Magnet.curve imag G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 50.0 Specifies first magnetizing current value of the saturation characteristic in [%] relative to the rated magnetizing current (P033). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 63

64 .9 List of Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current). Notice: The value belongs to the first flux value and must be less than or equal to magnetizing curve imag 2 (P0367). See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). p0367[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 2 / Magnet.curve imag2 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 75.0 Specifies second magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current (P033). Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current). Notice: The value belongs to the second flux value and must be less than or equal to magnetizing curve imag 3 (P0368) and greater than or equal to magnetizing curve imag (P0366). See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). p0368[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 3 / Magnet.curve imag3 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 35.0 Specifies third magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current (P033). Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current). Notice: The value belongs to the third flux value and must be less than or equal to magnetizing curve imag 4 (P0369) and greater than or equal to magnetizing curve imag 2 (P0367). See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). p0369[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 4 / Magnet.curve imag4 G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 70.0 Specifies fourth magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current (P033). Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current). Notice: The value belongs to the third flux value and must be less than or equal to magnetizing curve imag 3 (P0368). See P0362 (magnetizing curve flux ). 64 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

65 .9 List of r0370[0...2] Stator resistance [%] / Stator res. [%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays standardized stator resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0372[0...2] Cable resistance [%] / Cable res. [%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays standardized cable resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value)in [%]. It is estimated to be 20 % of the stator resistance. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0373[0...2] Rated stator resistance [%] / Rated stat.res.[%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays rated stator resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0374[0...2] Rotor resistance [%] / Rotor res. [%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays standardized rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 65

66 .9 List of r0376[0...2] Rated rotor resistance [%] / Rated rot. res.[%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays rated rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0377[0...2] Total leakage reactance [%] / Tot.leak.react.[%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays standardized total leakage reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0382[0...2] Main reactance [%] / Main reactance [%] G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays standardized main reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0384[0...2] Rotor time constant / Rotor time const. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays calculated rotor time constant [ms]. r0386[0...2] Total leakage time constant / Total leak. Tconst G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays total leakage time constant of motor. 66 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

67 .9 List of r0394 CO: Stator resistance IGBT [%] / Stat. res.igbt G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays stator resistance calculated in [%] from IGBT ON voltage and current amplitude. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0395 CO: Total stator resistance [%] / Total stat.res G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays stator resistance of motor as [%] of combined stator/cable resistance. Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% r0396 CO: Act. rotor resistance / Act rotor res. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays (adapted) rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%]. Notice: Values greater than 25 % tend to produce excessive motor slip. Check rated motor speed [rpm] value (P03). Rated motor impedance: V ph = VN Z N = = I ph 3 IN p p0305 <=>00% p0400[0...2] Select encoder type / Select enc. type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects encoder type (number of encoder channels). Values: 0: Disabled 2: Quadrature encoder without zero pulse 2: Quadrature encoder with zero pulse Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 67

68 .9 List of Dependency: Following table displays the setting of P0400 which depends upon the number of encoder channels: Parameter Terminal Track Encoder output p0400 = p0400 = 2 A A B single ended single ended Caution: When using Vector Control with encoder-feedback, the direction of rotation of the Encoder and Motor must be the same. If this is not achieved, then the functional operation of the Vector Control will not be guaranteed (positive instead of negative feedback). Extreme care must therefore be taken with respect to the connection of the motor to the inverter as well as the correct connection of the encoder to the inverter. Motor and Encoder must not be incorrectly wired up! When commissioning Vector Control with encoder-feedback (VC), the drive should be configured for V/f mode (see P300) first. Run the drive and compare r006 with r002 that should agree in sign and magnitude (with a deviation of only a few percent). Only if both criteria are fullfilled, change P300 and select VC (P300 = 2 or 23). See the Operating Instructions for more information. P0400 = 2 (quadrature encoder and zero pulse) will not detect encoder loss on Zero pulse. Zero pulse is only used to synchronise measured angle. Encoders with zero pulse can also be connected, but the zero pulse is not used. The term "quadrature" in setting 2 refers to two periodic functions separated by a quarter cycle or 90 degrees. If the Encoder is enabled (P400 > 0) and the Motor Holding Brake is enabled (P25 > 0), then in order to stop encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, then The delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P494 > P26 and P494 > P27) The delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P278 > P26 and P278 > P27) The Allowed Speed Difference P492 should be > Fmin P080 r0403 CO/BO: Encoder status word / Enc. StatWd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status word of encoder (in bit format). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Encoder module active Yes No - 0 Encoder error Yes No - 02 Signal o.k. Yes No - 03 Encoder Low Speed Loss Yes No - 04 Speed measurement using one encoder Yes No - pulse edge The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. 68 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

69 .9 List of p0405[0...2] Enables selection of various pulse types. / Enables pulse type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T bin Enables selection of various pulse types. Only bits 04 and 05 are used for Sinamics G20/ET200s. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 not used Yes No - 0 not used Yes No - 02 not used Yes No - 03 not used Yes No - 04 invert Z-pulse Yes No - 05 Z-pulse = Z-pulse & A-pulse & B-pulse Yes No - 06 not used Yes No - 07 not used Yes No - 08 not used Yes No - p0408[0...2] Encoder pulses per revolution / Enc pulses per rev G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Specifies the number of encoder pulses per revolution. The encoder resolution (pulses per revolution P0408) which may be entered will be limited by the max. pulse frequency of the encoder circuits (f_max = 300 khz). The following equation calculates the encoder frequency depending on the encoder resoulution and the rotational speed (rpm). The encoder frequency has to be less than the max. pulse frequency: f max > f = p0408 x rpm 60 p040[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F), G20 (CU240S) Reverses internal direction sense. / Rev dir sense. Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Reverses internal direction sense of the encoder signal. This does the same thing as switching the ENC_A and ENC_B signals. Values: 0: Encoder Normal Rotation : Encoder Reverse Rotation Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 69

70 .9 List of p049[0...2] Reaction on speed signal loss / Select enc. type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Selects reaction on loss of speed signal. Values: 0: Trip the drive. : Warn and switch to SLVC if in SVC. p0492[0...2] Allowed speed difference / Allowed speed dif G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Parameter P0492 is used for low and high speed encoder loss detection (fault: F0090). Dependency: Caution: a) High speed encoder loss detection: This condition occurs when the allowed frequency and the allowed difference of the speed signals between samples, set in P0492 is exceeded. P0492 and f(t_2) - f(t_) > P0492 b) Low speed encoder loss detection: This condition occurs when the actual frequency is<p0492 when encoder loss occurs. Condition : r006 = 0 and torque limit and then r006 = 0 with setpoint frequency > 0 for time > P0494 Condition 2): Act. freq. < P0492 and f (t_2) < P0492 and ASIC detect channel B loss This parameter is updated when motor start-up time P0345 is changed or when a speedloop optimisation is performed (P960 = ). There is a fixed delay of 40 ms before acting upon loss of encoder at high speeds. P0492 = 0 (disabled): When allowed speed difference is set to 0, both the high speed and low speed encoder loss detection is disabled, thus encoder loss will not be detected. If encoder loss detection is disabled and encoder loss occurs, then operation of the motor may become unstable. If the Encoder is enabled (P400 > 0) and the Motor Holding Brake is enabled (P25 > 0) then in order to stop encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, then the allowed Speed Difference P492 should be > Fmin P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

71 .9 List of p0494[0...2] Delay speed loss reaction / Dly speed loss rec G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] [] 0 Dependency: Caution: Used for low speed encoder loss detection. If the motor shaft speed is less than the value in P0492 then encoder loss is detected using a low speed encoder loss detection algorithm. This parameter selects the delay between loss of encoder at low speed and reaction to the encoder loss. This parameter is updated when motor start-up time P0345 is changed or when a speedloop optimisation is performed (P960 = ). P0494 = 0 (disabled): When the delay in P0494 is set to 0, then low speed encoder loss detection is disabled and low speed encoder loss cannot be detected (high speed encoder loss detection will still operate if P0492 > 0). If low speed encoder loss detection is disabled and encoder should be lost at low speed, then operation of motor may become unstable. If the Encoder is enabled (P400 > 0) and the Motor Holding Brake is enabled (P25 > 0), then in order to stop encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, then the delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P494 > P26 and P494 > P27 ) p0500[0...2] Technological application / Techn. application G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Applications Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T 0 0 Selects technological application. Sets control mode (P300). Values: 0: Constant torque : Pumps and fans Dependency: See parameter P0205 p060[0...2] Motor temperature sensor / Motor temp. sensor G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects motor temperature sensor. Values: 0: No sensor : PTC thermistor 2: KTY84 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 7

72 .9 List of Dependency: if "no sensor" is selected, the motor temperature monitoring will be done based on the estimated value of the thermal motor model. The temperature of the motor, when a thermal sensor is connected is calculated using the thermal motor model. When a KTY sensor is fitted, the loss of connection can be detected (Alarm F005). Using the methods described above the monitoring of the temperature will automatically switch to the thermal model using values derived from the estimated value. Using a PTC sensor the temperature of the motor is calculated by the sensor in conjunction with the thermal model. This allows for redundancy of the monitoring process. 5 V AI PTC KTY T = 4 s Fault F005 Signal loss detection Equivalent circuit data Power dissipation P V,mot 0 2 p060 p060 = 2 No sensor PTC KTY ϑ Thermal motor model V & r063 r0632 r r p0604 r0052 Bit3 Motor temp. reaction p060 PTC sensor: A PTC temperature sensor (Positive-Temperature-Characteristic) is a resistor with a positive temperature characteristic which, at normal temperatures, has a low resistance value ( Ohm). Normally, three PTC temperature sensors are connected in series in the motor (depending on the motor manufacturer), thus producing a "cold resistance value" ranging from 50 to 300 Ohm. PTC temperature sensors are also frequently referred to as cold conductors. However, at a certain threshold temperature, the resistance rises rapidly. The threshold temperature is selected by the motor manufacturer in such a way that it corresponds to the nominal temperature value of the motor insulation. This allows the change in the resistance value to be deployed to protect the motor, as the PTCs are embedded in the motor windings. PTC temperature sensors are not suitable for measuring temperature. When the PTC is connected and the selection motor temperature sensor has been activated by the setting P060 = (PTC sensor), the PTC temperature sensor then protects the motor by means of the trip device. Should the resistance value of 2000 Ohm be exceeded, the inverter displays error F000 (motor overheating). If the resistance value is below 00 Ohm, the error F005 (no motor temperature signal) is then output. This protects the motor from overheating and also from a sensor wire breakage. The motor is additionally monitored by the thermal motor model in the inverter, thus providing a redundant system for monitoring the motor. KTY84 sensor: The sensor KTY84 is basically a semi-conductor thermo-sensor (diode), the resistance value of which varies from some 500 Ohm at 0 C to 2600 Ohm at 300 C. It has a positive temperature coefficient and, in contrast to the PTCs, has an almost linear temperature characteristic. The resistor behaviour is comparable to that of a measuring resistor with a very high temperature coefficient. Note the following when connecting the polarity. Connect the sensor so that the diode is polarized in the operative direction. That means that the anode needs to be connected to terminal 4 = PTC+ and the cathode to terminal 5 = PTC-. If the temperature monitoring function is activated with the setting P060 = 2, the temperature of the sensor (thus that of the motor windings) is then written to parameter r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

73 .9 List of The motor overheating warning threshold needs to be assigned with parameter P0604 (the works setting is 30 C). This warning threshold depends on the motor's thermal class (see table below). Extract of IEC 85 Insulation class End temperature Y 90 C A 05 C E 20 C B 30 C F 55 C H 80 C The motor overheating disturbance threshold is automatically set by the inverter at 0 % higher than the temperature declared in parameter P0604. If the sensor KTY84 is activated, the motor temperature is then additionally calculated via the thermal motor model. Should the sensor KTY84 recognise a wire breakage, an alarm F005 (loss of the motor temperature signal) is then generated and the thermal motor model is automatically switched to. If the electric circuit to the sensor KTY84 is open or if a short circuit occurs, error F005 (no motor temperature signal) is then displayed. Connection failure: If the connection to the PTC or KTY84 sensor becomes open circuit or short circuit, a fault will be indicated, and by default the drive will trip. p0604[0...2] Threshold motor temperature / Thresh. mot. temp. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 30.0 Enters warning threshold for motor temperature protection. The trip temperature defined always 0 % higher than the warning level P0604. When act. motor temperature exeeds trip temperature than inverter trip as defined in P060. =. =. p0604 ϑ trip ϑ warn ϑ warn : Warning threshold (p0604) : Trip threshold (max. permissible temperature) ϑ trip Dependency: This value should be at least 40 C higher than the motor ambient temperature P0625. p0604 p C Default value depends on P0300 (select motor type). p060[0...2] Motor I2t temperature reaction / I2t temp. reaction G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 73

74 .9 List of Values: 0: No reaction, warning only : Warning and Imax reduction (results in reduced output frequency 2: Warning and trip (F00) Dependency: Trip level = P0604 (motor temperature warning level) * 05 % The purpose of motor I2t is to calculate or measure the motor temperature and disable the inverter if the motor is in danger of overheating. The motor temperature will be dependent on many factors, including the size of the motor, the ambient temperature, the previous history of the loading of the motor, and of course, the load current. (The square of the current actually determines the heating of the motor and the temperature rises with time - hence I2t). Because most motors are cooled by built in fans running at motor speed, the speed of the motor is also important. Clearly a motor running at high current (maybe due to boost) and a low speed, will overheat more quickly than one running at 50 or 60 Hz, full load. The inverter takes account of these factors. The drives also include inverter I2t protection (i.e. overheating protection, see P0290) in order to protect the units themselves. This operates independently of the motor I2t, and is not described here. I2t operation: The measured motor current is displayed in r0027. The motor temperature in C is now displayed in r0035. Therefore many other parameters are involved, including, for example, P0625, the ambient temperature. Parameter P0604 can now be adjusted to set the threshold temperature in comparison with r0035. P060 will change the reaction as before. The reaction to the warning can be changed from this default using P060. Parameter r0034 is particularly useful to monitor if the calculated motor temperature is rising excessively. p062[0...2] Motor temperature identification after restart / Mot.temp identific G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Starts the motor temperature identification after power on or start up. Values: 0: No identification : Temperature identification only after power on 2: Temperature identification after every power on It is necessary to run the motor data identification before using the motor temperature identification. If that wasn't done the results of the motor temperature identifications are wrong. 74 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

75 .9 List of p0622[0...2] Motor magnetizing time for temperature identification after sta / Mot.magnet.time fo G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Specifies the magnetization time for stator resistance identification. This parameter will be set as a result of the motor data identification according to the identified rotor time constant r93. r0623[0...2] CO: Display for the identified stator resistance / Act. stator resist G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Display of the actual identified stator resistance after temperature identification. p0625[0...2] Ambient motor temperature / Ambient mot. temp. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T [] 80.0 [] 20.0 Ambient temperature of motor at time of motor data identification. p0626 p0304 p0305 p0307 p0627 p0628 p0308 p030 p03 r0630 p0625 Thermal motor model r063 r0632 Equivalent circuit r0633 p90 It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold. A motor identification has to be made after changing the value. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 75

76 .9 List of p0626[0...2] Overtemperature stator iron / Overtemp.stat.iron G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 20.0 [] [] 50.0 Overtemperature of stator iron. Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises). Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered. p0627[0...2] Overtemperature stator winding / Overtemp.stat.wind G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 20.0 [] [] 80.0 Overtemperature of the stator winding. It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold. A motor identification has to be made after changing the value. Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises). Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered. p0628[0...2] Overtemperature rotor winding / Overtemp.rot. wind G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 20.0 [] [] 00.0 Overtemperature of the rotor winding. Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises). Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered. r0630[0...2] CO: Motor model ambient temperature / Mot. model amb. te G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays ambient temperature of motor mass model. 76 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

77 .9 List of r063[0...2] CO: Stator iron temperature / Stat.iron temp G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays iron temperature of motor mass model. r0632[0...2] CO: Stator winding temperature / Stat.wind.temp G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays stator winding temperature of motor mass model. r0633[0...2] CO: Rotor winding temperature / Rot. wind.temp G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays rotor winding temperature of motor mass model. p0640[0...2] Motor overload factor [%] / Motor ovl fact [%] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T 0.0 [] [] Dependency: Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current). Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower. min (r0209, 4 p0305) p0640max = p See function diagram for current limitation. p0700[0...2] Selection of command source / Command source sel G20 (CU240S) Access level: P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects digital command source. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 77

78 .9 List of Values: 0: Factory default setting : BOP (keypad) 2: Terminal 4: USS on RS232 5: USS on RS485 Example: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 78 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

79 .9 List of Dependency: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected (see table). P0700 = P0700 = 2 P0700 = 4 P0700 = 5 P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 79

80 .9 List of P P P P P P P P P P P P The following parameters are not overwritten when changing P0700: P080 P08 P0820 P082 P280 P282 P284 P286 P288 P2820 P2822 P2824 P2826 P2828 P2830 P2832 P2834 P2837 P2840 P2843 P2846 P2849 P2854 P2859 P2864 Caution: Changing this parameter from P0700 = x to P0700 = 2 resets functional settings (P070,...) of digital inputs to default. Be aware, by changing of parameter P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value or modified as listed in the table below. p0700[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Selection of command source / Command source sel Access level: P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects digital command source. Values: 0: Factory default setting : BOP (keypad) 2: Terminal 4: USS on RS232 6: Fieldbus Example: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: Changing this parameter from P0700 = x to P0700 = 2 resets functional settings (P070,...) of digital inputs to default. 80 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

81 .9 List of Caution: Be aware, by changing of parameter P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value or modified as listed in the table below. p070[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0 G20 (CU240S) Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 99 Selects function of digital input 0. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires P0700 command source or P000 =, P3900 =, 2 or 3 quick commissioning or P000 = 30, P0970 = factory reset in order to reset. "ON/OFF" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P070 = ). Configuring DI with P0702 = will disable DI0 by setting P070 = 0. "ON/OFF" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/off" on another digital input. Only the first activated digital input serves as a command source. p070[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 0. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 8

82 .9 List of Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires P0700 command source or P000 =, P3900 =, 2 or 3 quick commissioning or P000 = 30, P0970 = factory reset in order to reset. "ON/OFF" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P070 = ). Configuring DI with P0702 = will disable DI0 by setting P070 = 0. "ON/OFF" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/off" on another digital input. Only the first activated digital input serves as a command source. p0702[0...2] Function of digital input / Function of DI G20 (CU240S) Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization 82 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

83 .9 List of p0702[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input0). Function of digital input / Function of DI Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input0). p0703[0...2] Function of digital input 2 / Function of DI2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 2. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 83

84 .9 List of Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p0704[0...2] Function of digital input 3 / Function of DI3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 3. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). 84 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

85 .9 List of p0705[0...2] Function of digital input 4 / Function of DI4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 4. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p0706[0...2] Function of digital input 5 / Function of DI5 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 5. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 85

86 .9 List of Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p0707[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Function of digital input 6 / Function of DI6 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 6. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). 86 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

87 .9 List of p0708[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Function of digital input 7 / Function of DI7 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input 7. Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p0709[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Function of digital input 8 / Function of DI8 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 87

88 .9 List of [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p072[0...2] Analog / digital input 0 / Analog / digital i G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input A 0 (via analog input) Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). Signals above 4 V are active, signals below,6 V are inactive. p073[0...2] Analog / digital input / Analog / digital i G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects function of digital input A (via analog input) 88 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

89 .9 List of Values: 0: Digital input disabled : ON/OFF 2: ON reverse /OFF 3: OFF2 - coast to standstill 4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down 9: Fault acknowledge 0: JOG right : JOG left 2: Reverse 3: MOP up (increase frequency) 4: MOP down (decrease frequency) 5: Fixed frequency selector bit0 6: Fixed frequency selector bit 7: Fixed frequency selector bit2 8: Fixed frequency selector bit3 25: DC brake enable 27: Enable PID 29: External trip 33: Disable additional freq setpoint 99: Enable BICO parameterization [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) See P070 (function of digital input 0). p079[0...2] Signals above 4 V are active, signals below,6 V are inactive. Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. / Cmd.&freq.setp.sel G20 (CU240S) Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Central switch to select control command source for inverter. Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles. Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 89

90 .9 List of Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232 5: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS485 7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 0: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232 5: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS485 7: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter 4: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232 45: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS485 47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 50: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = BICO parameter 5: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 52: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 53: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 54: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS232 55: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS485 57: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: P079 has higher priority than P0700 and P000. If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not the setpoint source), P0844 / P0848 (first source of OFF2 / OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845 / P0849 (second source of OFF2 / OFF3) apply and the OFF commands are obtained via the particular source defined. BICO connections made previously remain unchanged. Notice: Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2. Settings in p079 (contrary to p0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P070, P0702,...) p079[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. / Cmd.&freq.setp.sel Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Central switch to select control command source for inverter. Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles. Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source. 90 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

91 .9 List of Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232 6: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fieldbus 7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 0: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232 6: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fieldbus 7: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter 4: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232 46: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fieldbus 47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 60: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = BICO parameter 6: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = MOP setpoint 62: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint 63: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fixed frequency 64: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = USS on RS232 66: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fieldbus 67: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: P079 has higher priority than P0700 and P000. If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not the setpoint source), P0844 / P0848 (first source of OFF2 / OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845 / P0849 (second source of OFF2 / OFF3) apply and the OFF commands are obtained via the particular source defined. BICO connections made previously remain unchanged. USS on RS485 is not supported. Notice: Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2. Settings in p079 (contrary to p0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P070, P0702,...) r0720 Number of digital inputs / Number of DI G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 r0722 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Displays number of digital inputs. CO/BO: Binary input values / Bin.inp.val Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of digital inputs. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 9

92 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Digital input 0 Yes No - 0 Digital input Yes No - 02 Digital input 2 Yes No - 03 Digital input 3 Yes No - 04 Digital input 4 Yes No - 05 Digital input 5 Yes No - 06 Digital input 6 Yes No - 07 Digital input 7 Yes No - 08 Digital input 8 Yes No - Digital input A 0 Yes No - 2 Digital input A Yes No - Segment is lit when signal is active. r0722 G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO/BO: Binary input values / Bin.inp.val Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of digital inputs. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Digital input 0 Yes No - 0 Digital input Yes No - 02 Digital input 2 Yes No - 03 Digital input 3 Yes No - 04 Digital input 4 Yes No - 05 Digital input 5 Yes No - Digital input A 0 Yes No - 2 Digital input A Yes No - Segment is lit when signal is active. p0724 Debounce time for digital inputs / Debounce time: DI G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs. Values: 0: No debounce time : 2.5 ms debounce time 2: 8.2 ms debounce time 3: 2.3 ms debounce time p0727 Selection of 2/3-wire method / 2/3-wire selection G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Determines the control method using the terminals. This parameter allows the selection of the control philosophy: 0 Siemens (start/dir) - (Method and Method 2) 2-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 3) 2 3-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 4) 3 3-wire (start/dir) - (Method 5) The control philosophies exclude each other. 92 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

93 .9 List of Values: 0: Siemens (start/dir) : 2-wire(fwd/rev) 2: 3-wire(fwd/rev) 3: 3-wire(start/dir) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 93

94 .9 List of Where: P denotes Pulse FWD denotes FORWARD REV denotes REVERSE When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the setting for the digital inputs (P070 - P0704) are redefined as follows: Redefined Digital Inputs Settings P070 - P0704 P0727 = 0 (Siemens Standard Control) ON/OFF P0727 = (2-wire Control) ON_FWD STOP 2 2 ON_REV/OFF ON_REV P0727 = 2 (3-wire Control) FWDP P0727 = 3 (3-wire Control) ON_PULSE OFF/HOLD REV REV REVP REV Regarding the use of fixed frequencies see P000 and P00. The function of the different control methods is described as follows: Siemens standard control using ON/OFF and REV ON/OFF ON/OFF REV REV Equivalent Control Inputs ON/OFF Active Control Commands REV Active Active Inverter Frequency f out o Time o = OFF 94 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

95 .9 List of Siemens standard control using ON/OFF and ON_REV/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON_REV/OFF ON_REV/OFF Equivalent Control Inputs ON/OFF Control Commands ON_REV/OFF Act. Active Ignored Ignored Active Inverter Frequency f out o o Time o = OFF 2-wire control using ON_FWD and ON_REV ON_FWD K ON_FWD ON_FWD ON_REV K2 ON_REV ON_REV Equivalent Control Inputs ON_FWD Act. Active Act. Act. Control Commands ON_REV Active Active Inverter Frequency f out o o o o o Time o = OFF Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 95

96 .9 List of 3-wire control using FWDP, REVP and STOP STOP FWDP REVP STOP FWDP REVP Equivalent Control Inputs STOP Active Active Control Commands FWDP Command ignored REVP Active Inverter Frequency f out o o Time o = OFF 3-wire control using ON_PULSE, OFF/HOLD and REV ON_PULSE OFF/HOLD REV ON_PULSE OFF/HOLD REV Equivalent Control Inputs Command ignored ON_PULSE Active Control Commands OFF/HOLD Active Active REV Active Active Inverter Frequency f out o o Time o = OFF r0730 Number of digital outputs / Number of DO G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of digital outputs (relays). 96 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

97 .9 List of p073[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 0 / Fct. of DO0 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 52:3 Defines source of digital output 0. Recommendation: 52. Drive ready to run 0 Closed 52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed 52.2 Drive running 0 Closed 52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed 52.4 OFF2 active Closed 52.5 OFF3 active Closed 52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed 52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed 52.8 Deviation setpoint/actual value Closed 52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control) 0 Closed 52.A Act. freq. f_act >= P082 (f_max) 0 Closed 52.B Warning: Motor current limit Closed 52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 0 Closed 52.D Motor overload Closed 52.E Motor running direction right 0 Closed 52.F Inverter overload Closed 53. Act. freq. f_act > P267 (f_off) 0 Closed 53.2 Act. freq. f_act > P080 (f_min) 0 Closed 53.3 Act. current r0027 >= P270 0 Closed 53.4 Act. freq. f_act > P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.5 Act. freq. f_act <= P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.6 Act. freq. f_act >= setpoint 0 Closed 53.A PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 0 Closed 53.B PID output r2294 == P229 (PID_max) 0 Closed [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Notice: An inverse logic can be realised by inverting the digital outputs in P0748. Output of fault bit 52.3 is inverted on digital output. Monitor functions ==> see parameter r0052, r0053 Motor holding brake ==> see parameter P25 p0732[0...2] BI: Function of digital output / Fct. of DO G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 52:7 Defines source of digital output. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 97

98 .9 List of Recommendation: 52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed 52. Drive ready to run 0 Closed 52.2 Drive running 0 Closed 52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed 52.4 OFF2 active Closed 52.5 OFF3 active Closed 52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed 52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed 52.8 Deviation setpoint/actual value Closed 52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control) 0 Closed 52.A Act. freq. f_act >= P082 (f_max) 0 Closed 52.B Warning: Motor current limit Closed 52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 0 Closed 52.D Motor overload Closed 52.E Motor running direction right 0 Closed 52.F Inverter overload Closed 53. Act. freq. f_act > P267 (f_off) 0 Closed 53.2 Act. freq. f_act > P080 (f_min) 0 Closed 53.3 Act. current r0027 >= P270 0 Closed 53.4 Act. freq. f_act > P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.5 Act. freq. f_act <= P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.6 Act. freq. f_act >= setpoint 0 Closed 53.A PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 0 Closed 53.B PID output r2294 == P229 (PID_max) 0 Closed [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p0733[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 2 / Fct. of DO2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines source of digital output Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

99 .9 List of Recommendation: 52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed 52. Drive ready to run 0 Closed 52.2 Drive running 0 Closed 52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed 52.4 OFF2 active Closed 52.5 OFF3 active Closed 52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed 52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed 52.8 Deviation setpoint/actual value Closed 52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control) 0 Closed 52.A Act. freq. f_act >= P082 (f_max) 0 Closed 52.B Warning: Motor current limit Closed 52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 0 Closed 52.D Motor overload Closed 52.E Motor running direction right 0 Closed 52.F Inverter overload Closed 53. Act. freq. f_act > P267 (f_off) 0 Closed 53.2 Act. freq. f_act > P080 (f_min) 0 Closed 53.3 Act. current r0027 >= P270 0 Closed 53.4 Act. freq. f_act > P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.5 Act. freq. f_act <= P255 (f_) 0 Closed 53.6 Act. freq. f_act >= setpoint 0 Closed 53.A PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 0 Closed 53.B PID output r2294 == P229 (PID_max) 0 Closed [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r0747 CO/BO: State of digital outputs / CO/BO:State DOs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Displays status of digital outputs (also includes inversion of digital outputs via P0748). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Digital output 0 energized Yes No - 0 Digital output energized Yes No - 02 Digital output 2 energized Yes No - Dependency: Bit 0 = 0 : Contacts open Bit 0 = : Contacts closed p0748 Invert digital outputs / Invert DOs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T bin Defines high and low states of relay for a given function. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Invert digital output 0 Yes No - 0 Invert digital output Yes No - 02 Invert digital output 2 Yes No - Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 99

100 .9 List of r0750 Number of AIs / Number of AIs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of analog inputs available. r075 CO/BO: Status word of AI / AI status Wd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of analog input. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Signal lost on AI0 Yes No - 0 Signal lost on AI Yes No - 08 No signal lost on AI0 Yes No - 09 No signal lost on AI Yes No - r0752[0...] Act. input of AI [V] or [ma] / Act.AI inp.[v/ma] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Displays smoothed analog input value in volts before the characteristic block. AI channel KL3 AI+ KL4 AI DIP switch AI type A D p0756 AI type p0753 p0757 p0758 p0759 p0760 AI scaling r0754 P076 AI dead zone p000 r0755 Setpoint Pxxxx p0756 p076 r V 0 Wire breakage sensing 3.9 V p0707 r0722 r pxxxx F0080 r075 Function [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) p0753[0...] Smooth time AI / Smooth time AI G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 3 Defines filter time (PT filter) in [ms] for analog input. [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Increasing this time (smooth) reduces jitter but slows down response to the analog input. P0753 = 0 : No filtering 00 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

101 .9 List of r0754[0...] Act. AI value after scaling [%] / AI after scal.[%] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Dependency: Shows smoothed value of analog input in [%] after scaling block. [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) P0757 to P0760 define range (AI scaling). r0755[0...] CO: Act. AI after scal. [4000h] / AI scal[4000h] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Integer6 Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax. Analog setpoint (ASP) from the analog scaling block can vary from min. analog setpoint (ASPmin) to a max. analog setpoint (ASPmax) as shown in P0757 (AI scaling). The largest magnitude (value without sign) of ASPmin and ASPmax defines the scaling of By associating parameter r0755 with an internal value (e.g. frequency setpoint), a scaled value is calculated internally by the Converter. The frequency value is calculated using the following equation: % AI ASP max ASP min 0 V V r0755 [Hex] r0755 [Hz] r0755 [Hz] = r0755 [Hex] 4000 [Hex] p2000 max ( ASPmax, ASPmin ) 00% Example: Case a: ASPmin = 300 %, ASPmax = 00 % then 6384 represents 300 %. This parameter will vary from 546 to Case b: ASPmin = -200 %, ASPmax = 00 % then 6384 represents 200 %. This parameter will vary from to [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) This value is used as an input to analog BICO connectors. ASPmax represents the highest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V). ASPmin represents the lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V). See parameters P0757 to P0760 (AI scaling) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 0

102 .9 List of p0756[0...] Type of AI / Type of AI G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Defines type of analog input and also enables analog input monitoring. To switch over from voltage to current analog input it is not sufficient to merely modify parameter P0756. Rather, the DIPs on the terminal board must also be set to the correct position. The DIP settings are as follows: OFF = voltage input (0 V) ON = current input (20 ma) Allocation of DIPs to analog inputs is as follows: Values: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 to +0 V) : Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 0 V) 2: Unipolar current input (0 to 20 ma) 3: Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 ma) 4: Bipolar voltage input (-0 V to +0 V) [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Dependency: Function disabled if analog scaling block programmed to output negative setpoints (see P0757 to P0760). Notice: When monitoring is enabled and a deadband defined (P076), a fault condition will be generated (F0080) if the analog input voltage falls below 50 % of the deadband voltage. On account of h/w restirction it is not possible to select the bipolar voltage (see Enum declaration) for analog input (P0756[] = 4). See P0757 to P0760 (AI scaling). 02 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

103 .9 List of p0757[0...] Value x of AI scaling / Value x:ai scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T P P0760 configure the input scaling as shown in the diagram: P0756 = , P076 = 0 % 00 % ASPmax 4000 h P0760 P0757 P V 20 ma x 00% V ma P0758 ASPmin Where: Analog setpoints represent a [%] of the normalized frequency in P2000. Analog setpoints may be larger than 00 %. ASPmax represents highest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V or 20 ma). ASPmin represents lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V or 20 ma). Default values provide a scaling of 0 V or 0 ma = 0 %, and 0 V or 20 ma = 00 %. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 03

104 .9 List of P0756 = 4, P076 = 0 % 00 % ASPmax 4000 h P0760 P V P V x 00% V P0758 ASPmin [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Notice: The value x2 of AI scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x of AI scaling P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

105 .9 List of The AI-linear characteristic is described by 4 coordinates, based on a two-point equation: y - p0758 p0760 p0758 = x - p0757 p0759 p0757 For calculations the point-gradient form (offset and gradient) is more advantageous: y = m x + y0 The transformation between these two forms is given by: p0760 p0758 m = p0759 p0757 y0 p0758 p0759 p0757 p0760 = p0759 p0757 For scaling of the input the value of y_max and x_min has to be determined. This is done by the following equations: p0760 p0757 p0758 p0759 xmin = p0760 p0758 p0760 p0758 ymax = (xmax xmin) p0759 p0757 p0760 y 2 y max y p0758 y y 0 x min m p0757 x p0759 x 2 x max x p0758[0...] Value y of AI scaling / Value y:ai scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Dependency: [] [] 0.0 Sets value of Y in [%] as described in P0757 (AI scaling) [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be generated. p0759[0...] Value x2 of AI scaling / Value x2:ai scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets value of X2 as described in P0757 (AI scaling). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 05

106 .9 List of [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Notice: The value x2 of AI scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x of AI scaling P0757. p0760[0...] Value y2 of AI scaling / Value y2:ai scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 00.0 Dependency: Sets value of Y2 in [%] as described in P0757 (AI scaling). [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be generated. p076[0...] Width of AI deadband / AI deadband width G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Example: Defines width of deadband on analog input. The diagrams below explain its use. The below example produces a 2 to 0 V, 0 to 50 Hz analog input (AI value 2 to 0 V, 0 to 50 Hz): The below example produces a 0 to 0 V analog input (-50 to +50 Hz) with center zero and a "holding point" 0.2 V wide (0. V to each side of center, AI value 0 to 0 V, -50 to +50 Hz): The below example produces a -0 to +0 V analog input (-50 to +50 Hz) with center zero and a "holding point" 0.2 V wide (0. V to each side of center, AI value -0 to +0 V, -50 to +50 Hz): Notice: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Deadband starts from 0 V to value of P076, if both values of P0758 and P0760 (y coordinates of AI scaling) are positive or negative respectively. However, deadband is active in both directions from point of intersection (x axis with AI scaling curve), if sign of P0758 and P0760 are opposite. Min. frequency P080 should be zero when using center zero setup. There is no hysteresis at the end of the deadband. P076[x] = 0 : No deadband active. p0762[0...] Delay for loss of signal action / Delay on sig. loss G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Defines time delay between loss of analog setpoint and appearance of fault code F0080. [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0) [] = Analog input (AI) Expert users can choose the desired reaction to F0080 (default is OFF2). 06 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

107 .9 List of r0770 Number of AO / Number of AO G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of analog outputs available. p077[0...] CI: AO / AO G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T Recommendation: 0:0 Max bico 2:0 Defines function of the 0-20 ma analog output. 2 CO: Act. frequency (scaled to P2000) 24 CO: Act. output frequency (scaled to P2000) 25 CO: Act. output voltage (scaled to P200) 26 CO: Act. DC-link voltage (scaled to P200) 27 CO: Act. output current (scaled to P2002) [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) p0773[0...] Smooth time AO / Smooth time AO G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 000 [] 2 Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for AO using a PT filter. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) Dependency: P0773 = 0: Deactivates filter. r0774[0...] Act. AO value [V] or [ma] / Act.AO val.[v/ma] G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Shows value of analog output in [ma] after filtering and scaling. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) p0775[0...] Permit absolute value / Enable ab. value G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Decides if the absolute value of the analog output is used. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute value of the value to be outputed. If the value was originally negative then the corresponding bit in R0783 is set, otherwise it is cleared. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 07

108 .9 List of p0776[0...] Type of AO / Type of AO G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Defines type of analog output. Values: 0: Current output : Voltage output [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) Analog Output 0 can be switched to a voltage output with a range 0..0V Analog Output is only a current output. By connecting an external resistor of 500 Ohm to the terminals ( 2/3 ) a voltage output with a range of 0..0V can be created. p0777[0...] Value x of AO scaling / Value x:ao scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.0 Defines x output characteristic in [%]. Scaling block is responsible for adjustment of output value defined in P077 (AO connector input). of AO scaling block (P P078) work as follows: Output signal (ma) 20 p0780 y 2 p0778 y 0 p0777 x p0779 x 2 00 % % Where: Points P (x, y) and P2 (x2, y2) can be chosen freely. Example: The default values of the scaling block provides a scaling of: P: 0.0 % = 0 ma P2: 00.0 % = 20 ma [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (referency frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be generated. 08 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

109 .9 List of The AO-linear characteristic is described by 4 coordinates, based on a two-point equation: y - p0778 p0780 p0778 = x - p0777 p0779 p0777 For calculations the point-gradient form (offset and gradient) is more advantageous: y = m x + y0 The transformation between these two forms is given by: p0780 p0778 p0778 p0779 p0777 p0780 m = y0 = p0779 p0777 p0779 p % For scaling of the input the value of y_max and x_min has to be determined. This is done by the following equations: p0780 p0777 p0778 p0779 xmin = p0780 p0778 p0780 p0778 ymax = (xmax xmin) p0779 p0777 p0780 y 2 p0778 y y max y y 0 x min m p0777 x p0779 x 2 x max x p0778[0...] Value y of AO scaling / Value y:ao scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines y of output characteristic. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) p0779[0...] Value x2 of AO scaling / Value x2:ao scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 00.0 Defines x2 of output characteristic in [%]. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 09

110 .9 List of Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (referency frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be generated. p0780[0...] Value y2 of AO scaling / Value y2:ao scal. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines y2 of output characteristic. [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) p078[0...] Width of AO deadband / AO deadband width G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets width of dead-band in [ma] for analog output. ma 20 p0780 y2 p078 p0778 y p0777 x p0779 x 2 00 % % [0] = Analog output 0 (AO 0) [] = Analog output (AO ) r0785 CO/BO: Status word of AO / AO stat Wd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of analog output. Bit 0 indicates that the value of analog output is negative. Bit indicates that the value of analog output 2 is negative. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Analog output 0 -ve Yes No - 0 Analog output -ve Yes No - 0 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

111 .9 List of p0800[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 0 / Dwnl.par.set 0 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines source of command to start download of parameter set 0 from attached AOP. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source, the last digit refers to the bit setting for that parameter. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Signal of digital input: 0 = No download = Start download parameter set 0 from AOP. p080[0...2] BI: Download parameter set / Dwnl.par.set G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines sources of command to start download of parameter set from attached AOP. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source, the last digit refers to the bit setting for that parameter. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Signal of digital input: 0 = No download = Start download parameter set from AOP. p0802 Transfer data from EEPROM / Transf.Drive->Ext G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Transfers values from drive to External device when none 0. Parameter P000 must be set to 30 for this to be possible. Values: 0: Disabled : Start BOP Transfer 2: Start MMC Transfer Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer. P000 will be reset to 0 on successful completion. Ensure that enough space exists on the MMC card before transferring data (8kb). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

112 .9 List of p0803 Transfer data to EEPROM / Transf.Ext->Drive G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Transfers values from External to drive when none 0. Parameter P000 must be set to 30 for this to be possible. Values: 0: Disabled : Start BOP Transfer 2: Start MMC Transfer Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer. P000 will be reset to 0 on successful completion. p0804 Select Clone file / Select Clone file G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T Select clone file to up/down load. if P804=0 then file name is clone00.bin if P804= then file name is clone0.bin etc. p0809[0...2] Copy Command Dataset (CDS) / Copy CDS G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T Calls 'Copy Command Dataset (CDS)' function. Example: The list of all Command Datasets (CDS) are shown in the opening instructions of the Parameter List (PLI). Copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure: [0] = Copy from CDS [] = Copy to CDS [2] = Start copy Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function. 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

113 .9 List of p080 BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) / CDS b 0 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Command Dataset (CDS). Selecting CDS BI: CDS Bit p08 (0:0) BI: CDS B0 loc/rem p080 (0:0) CDS active r Changeover time approx. 4 ms t Changeover time approx. 4 ms CO/BO: Zusatz STW r r CO/BO: STW r r CO/BO: Aktiver CDS r t The actual active Command Dataset (CDS) is displayed in parameter r0050. r0055 Bit5 selected CDS r0054 Bit5 CDS0 0 0 CDS 0 CDS2 0 CDS2 active CDS r Recommendation: Example: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) Typical procedure for CDS switch-over: Steps: P08 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) set selection. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 3

114 .9 List of p080 BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) / CDS b 0 G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Command Dataset (CDS). Selecting CDS BI: CDS Bit p08 (0:0) BI: CDS B0 loc/rem p080 (0:0) CDS active r Changeover time approx. 4 ms t Changeover time approx. 4 ms CO/BO: Zusatz STW r r CO/BO: STW r r CO/BO: Aktiver CDS r t The actual active Command Dataset (CDS) is displayed in parameter r0050. r0055 Bit5 selected CDS r0054 Bit5 CDS0 0 0 CDS 0 CDS2 0 CDS2 active CDS r Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) P08 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) set selection. 4 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

115 .9 List of p08 BI: CDS bit / CDS bit G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which to read Bit for selecting a Command Dataset (see P080) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) P080 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) selection. p08 BI: CDS bit / CDS bit G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Selects command source from which to read Bit for selecting a Command Dataset (see P080) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) P080 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) selection. p089[0...2] Copy Drive Dataset (DDS) / Copy DDS G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T Calls 'Copy Drive Dataset (DDS)' function. The list of all Drive Dataset (DDS) are shown in the opening instructions of the Parameter List (PLI). [0] = Copy from DDS [] = Copy to DDS [2] = Start copy Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 5

116 .9 List of p0820 BI: DDS bit 0 / DDS bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Drive Dataset (DDS). Drive running Drive ready Selecting DDS t BI: DDS bit p082 (0:0) BI: DDS bit 0 p0820 (0:0) DDS active r005[] Changeover time approx. 50 ms CO/BO:Adicc.PalCtr r r CO/BO:Adicc.PalCtr r r t Changeover time approx. 50 ms 2 CO: J. DDS activo r005.0 [2] 0 t The actual active Drive Dataset (DDS) is displayed in parameter r005[]. r0055 Bit05 selected DDS r0055 Bit04 DDS0 0 0 DDS 0 DDS2 0 DDS2 r005 [0] active DDS r005 [] Recommendation: Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. P082 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection. 6 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

117 .9 List of p0820 BI: DDS bit 0 / DDS bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Drive Dataset (DDS). Drive running Drive ready Selecting DDS t BI: DDS bit p082 (0:0) BI: DDS bit 0 p0820 (0:0) DDS active r005[] Changeover time approx. 50 ms CO/BO:Adicc.PalCtr r r CO/BO:Adicc.PalCtr r r t Changeover time approx. 50 ms 2 CO: J. DDS activo r005.0 [2] 0 t The actual active Drive Dataset (DDS) is displayed in parameter r005[]. r0055 Bit05 selected DDS r0055 Bit04 DDS0 0 0 DDS 0 DDS2 0 DDS2 r005 [0] active DDS r005 [] Recommendation: Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. P082 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 7

118 .9 List of p082 BI: DDS bit / DDS bit G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Dependency: Selects command source from which Bit for selecting a Drive Dataset is to be read in (see parameter P0820) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. P0820 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection. p082 BI: DDS bit / DDS bit G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Selects command source from which Bit for selecting a Drive Dataset is to be read in (see parameter P0820) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. P0820 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection. p0840[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: ON/OFF / ON/OFF Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:0 Allows ON/OFF command source to be selected using BICO. The digits in front of the colon show the parameter number of the command source; the digits following the colon denote the bit setting for that parameter. 8 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

119 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0). Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P070) before changing value of P0840. p0840[0...2] When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. BI: ON/OFF / ON/OFF G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Allows ON/OFF command source to be selected using BICO. The digits in front of the colon show the parameter number of the command source; the digits following the colon denote the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0). Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P070) before changing value of P0840. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 9

120 .9 List of p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF / ON/OFF G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:0 Recommendation: Dependency: Allows ON/OFF command source to be selected using BICO. The digits in front of the colon show the parameter number of the command source; the digits following the colon denote the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0). Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P070) before changing value of P0840. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p0842[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: ON reverse/off / ON reverse/off Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Allows ON/OFF reverse command source to be selected using BICO. Dabei wird i.a. bei einem positiven Frequenzsollwert dieser entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn (negative Frequenz) angefahren. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP 20 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

121 .9 List of p0842[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: ON reverse/off / ON reverse/off Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Allows ON/OFF reverse command source to be selected using BICO. Dabei wird i.a. bei einem positiven Frequenzsollwert dieser entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn (negative Frequenz) angefahren. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p0844[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI:. OFF2 /. OFF2 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090: Recommendation: Defines first source of OFF2 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP 9. = OFF2: Electrical stop via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 2

122 .9 List of Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. : 0 = Pulse disabling. = Operating condition. p0844[0...2] BI:. OFF2 /. OFF2 G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090: Recommendation: Defines first source of OFF2 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) Dependency: 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP 9. = OFF2: Electrical stop via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. : 0 = Pulse disabling. = Operating condition. p0844[0...2] BI:. OFF2 /. OFF2 G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines first source of OFF2 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter. 22 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

123 .9 List of Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP 9. = OFF2: Electrical stop via BOP Dependency: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. : 0 = Pulse disabling. = Operating condition. p0845[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9: Recommendation: Defines second source of OFF2. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) Dependency: 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) In contrast to P0844 (first source of OFF2), this parameter is always active, independent of P079 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. : 0 = Pulse disabling. = Operating condition. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 23

124 .9 List of p0845[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP) G20 (CU240S) BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines second source of OFF2. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) In contrast to P0844 (first source of OFF2), this parameter is always active, independent of P079 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. : 0 = Pulse disabling. = Operating condition. p0848[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI:. OFF3 /. OFF3 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:2 Recommendation: Defines first source of OFF3 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP 24 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

125 .9 List of [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0. OFF3 is low-active, i.e. 0 = Quick ramp-down. = Operating condition. p0848[0...2] BI:. OFF3 /. OFF3 G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:2 Defines first source of OFF3 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter. Recommendation: 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0. OFF3 is low-active, i.e. 0 = Quick ramp-down. = Operating condition. p0848[0...2] BI:. OFF3 /. OFF3 G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines first source of OFF3 when P079 = 0 (BICO). The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 25

126 .9 List of Recommendation: 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0. OFF3 is low-active, i.e. 0 = Quick ramp-down. = Operating condition. p0849[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines second source of OFF3. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter. Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active, independent of P079 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0. OFF3 is low-active, i.e. 0 = Quick ramp-down. = Operating condition. 26 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

127 .9 List of p0849[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP) G20 (CU240S) BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T p0852[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:3 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines second source of OFF3. The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the bit setting for that parameter. Recommendation: 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.0 = ON/OFF via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active, independent of P079 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0. OFF3 is low-active, i.e. 0 = Quick ramp-down. = Operating condition. Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Active only when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 27

128 .9 List of p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:3 Dependency: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Active only when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Active only when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. 28 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

129 .9 List of p098 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CB address / CB address Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Defines address of CB (communication board) or address of the other option modules. There are two ways to set the bus address: via DIP switches on the PROFIBUS module 2 via a user-entered value Possible PROFIBUS settings: , 26, 27 are not allowed The following applies when a PROFIBUS module is used: DIP switch = 0 Address defined in P098 (CB address) is valid DIP switch not = 0 DIP switch setting has priority and P098 indicates DIP switch setting. p0922 Selection of Profibus Standard Telegram. / Standard Telegram G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 999 Selects the Profibus Standard Telegram. Values: : Standard Telegram 20: Standard Telegram : Standard Telegram : Standard Telegram : Free Bico connection Dependency: Setting Standard Telegram has effect only when ProfiBus is selected. Selection, 20, 350, 352 are Standard Telegram and the corresponding Bico connections will be freezed during Standard Telegram. Setting p0922 from Standard Telegram to 999, the Bico connections are kept but Bico connection can be changed freely. Only Standard Telefram 350 has effect on control word 2. Change of p0922 also resets all the Bico connections corresponding to settings in P0700. Example: P0700=4, P0922 =, P0840 = Change p0840 = Now change P922 to other Standard Telegram : the parameter P0840 will be reset to ( due to P0700 = 4 ) When p0922 is changed the following parameters can be modified : P0840, P0844, P0848, P0852, P40, P4, P42, P204, P055, P056, P3, P035, P036, P080, P0820.for the control word P020, P02, P022, P023, P0820, P082, P2200, P230, P50, P206.for the control word 2 Switching to / from Namur : Changing P0922 to 20 (Tel. 20) automatically switches P2038 to 2 (VIK/Namur). Changing P0922 to another value switches P2038 to 0 ( Profidrive profil). Changing P0922 NEVER affects P2042 (Ident number). P2042 must be switched manually, and a power cycle must be done after. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 29

130 .9 List of p0927 Parameter changeable via / Change par. via G20 (CU240S) Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T Example: - - bin Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters. This parameter allows the user to easily protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters. Annotation: Parameter P0927 is not password protected. Bits 0,, 2 and 3 set: The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface. If all bits are set, the parameter is displayed on BOP as follows: Bits 0,, 2 and 3 reset: This setting allows no parameters to be modified via any interface with the exception of P0003 and P0927. If all bits are reset, the parameter is displayed on BOP as follows: Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fieldbus Yes No - 0 BOP Yes No - 02 USS on RS232 Yes No - 03 USS on RS485 Yes No - The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. p0927 G20 (CU240S DP, CU240S DP-F) Parameter changeable via / Change par. via Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T - - bin Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters. This parameter allows the user to easily protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters. Annotation: Parameter P0927 is not password protected. Example: Bits 0,, 2 and 3 set: The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface. If all bits are set, the parameter is displayed on BOP as follows: Bits 0,, 2 and 3 reset: This setting allows no parameters to be modified via any interface with the exception of P0003 and P0927. If all bits are reset, the parameter is displayed on BOP as follows: Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fieldbus Yes No - 0 BOP Yes No - 02 USS on RS232 Yes No - The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. r0944 Total number of messages / Total nb Mes G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the total number of messages available 30 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

131 .9 List of r0947[0...63] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) CO: Last fault code / Last fault code Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Displays fault history according to the diagram below where: "F" is the first active fault (not yet acknowledged). "F2" is the second active fault (not yet acknowledged). "Fe" is the occurrence of the fault acknowledgement for F & F2. This moves the value in the 2 indices down to the next pair of indices, where they are stored. Indices 0 & contain the active faults. When faults are acknowledged, indices 0 & are reset to 0. r0947[0] r0947[] r0947[2] r0947[3] r0947[4] r0947[5] r0947[6] r0947[7] F Fe Fe Fe F2 Fe Fe Fe Active Fault Codes Most recent Fault Codes - Most recent Fault Codes - 2 Most recent Fault Codes - 3 Example: If the inverter trips on undervoltage and then receives an external trip before the undervoltage is acknowledged, you will obtain: Whenever a fault in index 0 is acknowledged (Fe), the fault history shifts as indicated in the diagram above. [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault [] = Recent fault trip --, fault 2 [2] = Recent fault trip --, fault 3 [3] = Recent fault trip --, fault 4 [4] = Recent fault trip --, fault 5 [5] = Recent fault trip --, fault 6 [6] = Recent fault trip --, fault 7 [7] = Recent fault trip --, fault 8 [8] = Recent fault trip -, fault [9] = Recent fault trip -, fault 2... Dependency: Index used only if second fault occurs before first fault is acknowledged. See "Faults and Warnings" Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 3

132 .9 List of r0947[0...63] G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO: Last fault code / Last fault code Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Displays fault history according to the diagram below where: "F" is the first active fault (not yet acknowledged). "F2" is the second active fault (not yet acknowledged). "Fe" is the occurrence of the fault acknowledgement for F & F2. This moves the value in the 2 indices down to the next pair of indices, where they are stored. Indices 0 & contain the active faults. When faults are acknowledged, indices 0 & are reset to 0. r0947[0] r0947[] r0947[2] r0947[3] r0947[4] r0947[5] r0947[6] r0947[7] F Fe Fe Fe F2 Fe Fe Fe Active Fault Codes Most recent Fault Codes - Most recent Fault Codes - 2 Most recent Fault Codes - 3 Example: If the inverter trips on undervoltage and then receives an external trip before the undervoltage is acknowledged, you will obtain: Whenever a fault in index 0 is acknowledged (Fe), the fault history shifts as indicated in the diagram above. [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault [] = Recent fault trip --, fault 2 [2] = Recent fault trip --, fault 3 [3] = Recent fault trip --, fault 4 [4] = Recent fault trip --, fault 5 [5] = Recent fault trip --, fault 6 [6] = Recent fault trip --, fault 7 [7] = Recent fault trip --, fault 8 [8] = Recent fault trip -, fault [9] = Recent fault trip -, fault 2... Dependency: Index used only if second fault occurs before first fault is acknowledged. Notice: It is possible that this parameter is empty but a fault is still indicated by the Drive. The reason for this is most likely due to a SAFE CONDITION still existing in the system. In this situation the alarm is cleared from this parameter and it makes no sense to go back to a READY STATE. First remove the reason for the SAFE CONDITION and then the Drive will be able to change to a READY STATE. (SAFE CONDITION example is "safety function is activated") See "Faults and Warnings" r0948[0...63] Fault time / Fault time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32 Example: Time stamp to indicate when the fault has occurred. P24 (run-time counter) or P25 (real time clock) are the possible sources of the time stamp. The time is taken from P25 if this parameter has been updated with the real time. If not, P24 is used. 32 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

133 .9 List of [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault time [] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 2 [2] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 3 [3] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 4 [4] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 5 [5] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 6 [6] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 7 [7] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 8 [8] = Recent fault trip -, fault time [9] = Recent fault trip -, fault time 2... P25 can be updated via Starter, DriveMonitor, etc. r0949[0...63] CO: Fault value / Fault value G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32 Displays drive fault values. It is for service purposes and indicate the type of fault reported. The values are not documented. They are listed in the code where faults are reported. [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault value [] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 2 [2] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 3 [3] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 4 [4] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 5 [5] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 6 [6] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 7 [7] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 8 [8] = Recent fault trip -, fault value [9] = Recent fault trip -, fault time 2... p0952 Total number of faults / Total faults G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Dependency: Displays number of faults stored in P0947 (last fault code). Setting 0 resets fault history. (changing to 0 also resets parameter r fault time). r0964[0...6] Firmware version data / FW version data G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Firmware version data. Example: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [] = Product type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = Number of drive objects [6] = Firmware version Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 33

134 .9 List of r0965 Profibus profile / Profibus profile G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Identification for PROFIDrive.Profile number and version. r0967 Control word / Control word G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes - 03 Pulse enable Yes No - 04 RFG enable Yes No - 05 RFG start Yes No - 06 Setpoint enable Yes No - 07 Fault acknowledge Yes No - 08 JOG right Yes No - 09 JOG left Yes No - 0 Control from PLC Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - 5 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No - r0968 Status word / Status word G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays active status word of inverter (in binary) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Drive ready Yes No - 0 Drive ready to run Yes No - 02 Drive running Yes No - 03 Drive fault active Yes No - 04 OFF2 active No Yes - 05 OFF3 active No Yes - 06 ON inhibit active Yes No - 07 Drive warning active Yes No - 08 Deviation setpoint / act. value No Yes - 09 PZD control Yes No - 0 f_act >= P082 (f_max) Yes No - Warning: Motor current/torque limit No Yes - 2 Brake active Yes No - 3 Motor overload No Yes - 4 Motor runs right Yes No - 5 Inverter overload No Yes - p0969 Resetable system run time counter / Rst counter G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T Resetable system run time counter 34 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

135 .9 List of p0970 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Factory reset / Factory reset Access level: P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: P0970 = resets all parameters to their default values. Values: 0: Disabled : Parameter reset 0: Safety reset Dependency: First set P000 = 30 (factory settings). Stop drive (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values. The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset: When transferring parameter p0970, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kwh] P004 Store mode P000 Europe / North America P098 CB address P200 USS baud rate P20 USS address p0970 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Factory reset / Factory reset Access level: P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: P0970 = resets all parameters to their default values. Values: 0: Disabled : Parameter reset 0: Safety reset Dependency: First set P000 = 30 (factory settings). Stop drive (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 35

136 .9 List of The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset: When transferring parameter p0970, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kwh] P004 Store mode P000 Europe / North America P098 CB address P200 USS baud rate P20 USS address On the safety module (F-CU) setting 0 is available to reset the safety parameters to their default values. Only the safety parameters will be reset. Select P000 = 30 before and set the safety password. The reset of safety parameters including safety dynamization will take about 5 s. p097 Transfer data from RAM to EEPROM / Transf.RAM->EEPROM G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Transfers values from RAM to EEPROM when set to. Values: 0: Disabled : Start transfer All values in RAM are transferred to EEPROM. Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after successful transfer. The storage from RAM to EEPROM is accomplished via P097. The communications are reset, if the transfer was successful. During the reset process communications will be interrupted. This creates the following conditions: PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) enters Stop mode Starter automatically recovers communications once they are re-established. BOP displays "busy" After completion of the transfer process, the communication between the inverter and the PC-tools (e.g. Starter) or BOP is automatically re-established. r0980[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

137 .9 List of [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r098[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0982[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0983[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 37

138 .9 List of [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0984[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0985[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0986[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

139 .9 List of [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0987[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0988[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list r0989[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 contains 00 parameter numbers index Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 39

140 .9 List of [0] = Parameter [] = Parameter 2 [2] = Parameter 3 [3] = Parameter 4 [4] = Parameter 5 [5] = Parameter 6 [6] = Parameter 7 [7] = Parameter 8 [8] = Parameter 9 [9] = Parameter 0 The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list p000[0...2] Selection of frequency setpoint / Freq setp. select. G20 (CU240S) Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects frequency setpoint source. In the table of possible settings below, the main setpoint is selected from the least significant digit (i.e., 0 to 7) and any additional setpoint from the most significant digit (i.e., x0 through to x7). 40 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

141 .9 List of Values: 0: No main setpoint : MOP setpoint 2: Analog setpoint 3: Fixed frequency 4: USS on RS232 5: USS on RS485 7: Analog setpoint 2 0: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint : MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint 2: Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint 3: Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint 4: USS on RS232 + MOP setpoint 5: USS on RS485 + MOP setpoint 7: Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint 20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 23: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 25: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 30: No main setpoint + Fixed frequency 3: MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency 32: Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency 33: Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency 34: USS on RS232 + Fixed frequency 35: USS on RS485 + Fixed frequency 37: Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency 40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232 4: MOP setpoint + USS on RS232 42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232 43: Fixed frequency + USS on RS232 44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232 45: USS on RS485 + USS on RS232 47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232 50: No main setpoint + USS on RS485 5: MOP setpoint + USS on RS485 52: Analog setpoint + USS on RS485 53: Fixed frequency + USS on RS485 54: USS on RS232 + USS on RS485 55: USS on RS485 + USS on RS485 57: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS485 70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 7: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 73: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2 74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2 75: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2 77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2 Example: Setting 2 selects main setpoint (2) derived from analog input with additional setpoint () taken from the motor potentiometer. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 4

142 .9 List of Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected (see table). P000 = xy x = 0 x = x = 2 x = 3 x = 4 x = 5 x = 7 P000 = xy y = 0 y = y = 2 y = 3 y = 4 y = 5 y = P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P076 Example: P000 = 2 P070 = P07 =.0 P075 = P076 =.0 Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint. MOP ==> see parameter r050 AI ==> see parameter r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

143 .9 List of p000[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Selection of frequency setpoint / Freq setp. select. Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects frequency setpoint source. In the table of possible settings below, the main setpoint is selected from the least significant digit (i.e., 0 to 7) and any additional setpoint from the most significant digit (i.e., x0 through to x7). Values: 0: No main setpoint : MOP setpoint 2: Analog setpoint 3: Fixed frequency 4: USS on RS232 6: Fieldbus 7: Analog setpoint 2 0: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint : MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint 2: Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint 3: Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint 4: USS on RS232 + MOP setpoint 6: Fieldbus + MOP setpoint 7: Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint 20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 23: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 26: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 30: No main setpoint + Fixed frequency 3: MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency 32: Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency 33: Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency 34: USS on RS232 + Fixed frequency 36: Fieldbus + Fixed frequency 37: Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency 40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232 4: MOP setpoint + USS on RS232 42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232 43: Fixed frequency + USS on RS232 44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232 46: Fieldbus + USS on RS232 47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232 60: No main setpoint + Fieldbus 6: MOP setpoint + Fieldbus 62: Analog setpoint + Fieldbus 63: Fixed frequency + Fieldbus 64: USS on RS232 + Fieldbus 66: Fieldbus + Fieldbus 67: Analog setpoint 2 + Fieldbus 70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 7: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 73: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2 74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2 76: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 2 77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 43

144 .9 List of Example: Caution: Setting 2 selects main setpoint (2) derived from analog input with additional setpoint () taken from the motor potentiometer. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected (see table). P000 = xy x = 0 x = x = 2 x = 3 x = 4 x = 6 x = 7 P000 = xy y = 0 y = y = 2 y = 3 y = 4 y = 6 y = P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P076 Example: P000 = 26 P070 = P07 =.0 P075 = P076 =.0 Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint. MOP ==> see parameter r050 AI ==> see parameter r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

145 .9 List of p00[0...2] Fixed frequency / Fixed frequency G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint. Example: Dependency: There are 2 types of fixed frequencies: 5. Direct selection 6. Binary coded selection 7. Direct selection (P06 = ): 8. Binary coded selection (P06 = 2): Direct selection of FF via DI: Select fixed frequency operation (using P000). r025 must be connected to P840 to start. Fixed frequencies can be selected using the digital inputs. p002[0...2] Fixed frequency 2 / Fixed frequency 2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 5.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p003[0...2] Fixed frequency 3 / Fixed frequency 3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 3. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 45

146 .9 List of p004[0...2] Fixed frequency 4 / Fixed frequency 4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 5.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 4. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p005[0...2] Fixed frequency 5 / Fixed frequency 5 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 5. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p006[0...2] Fixed frequency 6 / Fixed frequency 6 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 6. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p007[0...2] Fixed frequency 7 / Fixed frequency 7 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 7. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). 46 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

147 .9 List of p008[0...2] Fixed frequency 8 / Fixed frequency 8 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 8. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p009[0...2] Fixed frequency 9 / Fixed frequency 9 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 9. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p00[0...2] Fixed frequency 0 / Fixed frequency 0 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 0. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p0[0...2] Fixed frequency / Fixed frequency G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 47

148 .9 List of p02[0...2] Fixed frequency 2 / Fixed frequency 2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p03[0...2] Fixed frequency 3 / Fixed frequency 3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 3. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p04[0...2] Fixed frequency 4 / Fixed frequency 4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 4. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). p05[0...2] Fixed frequency 5 / Fixed frequency 5 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines fixed frequency setpoint 5. See parameter P00 (fixed frequency ). 48 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

149 .9 List of p06 Fixed frequency mode / FF mode G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 2 Fixed frequencies can be selected in two different modes. Parameter P06 defines the mode. Values: : Direct selection 2: Binary selection See table in P00 (fixed frequency ) for description of how to use fixed frequencies. p020[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 / FF sel. Bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:3 Dependency: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. p020[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 / FF sel. Bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:3 Recommendation: Recommendation: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 49

150 .9 List of Dependency: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. p02[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit / FF sel. Bit G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:4 Dependency: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. See P020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings p022[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 / FF sel. Bit 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:5 Dependency: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. See P020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings p023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3 G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:6 Dependency: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. See P020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings 50 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

151 .9 List of p023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T Dependency: 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines origin of fixed frequency selection. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Accessible only if P070 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. See P020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings r024 CO: Act. fixed frequency / Act. FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays sum total of selected fixed frequencies. r025 BO: Fixed frequency status / FF Status G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the status of fixed frequencies. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Status of FF Yes No - p03[0...2] Setpoint memory of the MOP / MOP setp. memory G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Saves last motor potentiometer setpoint (MOP) that was active before OFF command or power down. Values: 0: MOP setpoint will not be stored : MOP setpoint will be stored (P040 is updated) On next ON command, motor potentiometer setpoint will be the saved value in parameter P040 (setpoint of the MOP). p032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP / Inhib. MOP reverse G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 Inhibits reverse setpoint selection. Values: 0: Reverse direction is allowed : Reverse direction inhibited Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 5

152 .9 List of It is possible to change motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase / decrease frequency either by using digital inputs or OP keypad up / down (e.g. BOP)). The "reversing key" of the OP (e.g. BOP) is not affected by the settings of P032. Use P0 to fully prevent change of motor direction. p035[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:3 Dependency: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.D = MOP up via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP) G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:3 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.D = MOP up via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. 52 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

153 .9 List of p035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9:3 Dependency: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.D = MOP up via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p036[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:4 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.E = MOP down via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN) G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:4 Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 53

154 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.E = MOP down via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9:4 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.E = MOP down via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p040[0...2] Setpoint of the MOP / MOP setpoint G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 5.00 Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control (P000 = ). Dependency: Motor potentiometer (P040) must be chosen as main setpoint or additional setpoint (using P000). 54 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

155 .9 List of To re-enable reverse direction, set P032 = 0. A short press of the 'up' or 'down' keys (e.g.: BOP) will change the frequency setpoint in steps of 0.Hz. A longer press will cause an accelerated frequency setpoint change. If motor potentiometer setpoint is selected either as main setpoint or additional setpoint, the reverse direction will be inhibited by default of P032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP). To re-enable reverse direction, set P032 = 0. A short press of the 'up' or 'down' keys (e.g.: BOP) will change the frequency setpoint in steps of 0.Hz. A longer press will cause an accelerated frequency setpoint change. r050 CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP / MOP outp.freq. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays output frequency of motor potentiometer setpoint ([Hz]). DI BOP P t USS on RS 232 USS on RS 485 Fieldbus P035 P f P082 t t P080 -P080 P20 P2 t -P082 r050 f act Notice: If the MOP is enabled by short pulses of less than second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0. Hz. p055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG -> G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:8 Defines source of JOG right when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 55

156 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG right via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG -> G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:8 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source of JOG right when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG right via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG -> G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines source of JOG right when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). 56 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

157 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG right via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <- G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:9 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source of JOG left when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG left via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <- G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:9 Defines source of JOG left when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 57

158 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG left via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <- G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Dependency: Defines source of JOG left when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 9.8 = JOG left via BOP [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p057 JOG Enable / JOG Enable G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T 0000 bin 000 bin 000 bin While JOG Enable is '0' Jogging (p056 and p055) is disabled. When '' Jogging is enabled. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 58 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

159 .9 List of p058[0...2] JOG frequency / JOG frequency G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 5.00 Jogging increases the motor speed by small amounts. The JOG buttons use a non-latching switch on one of the digital inputs to control the motor speed. While the JOG button is pressed, parameter P058 determines the frequency at which the inverter will run. The JOG mode allows the operator to perform a specific number of revolutions and position the rotor manually. The motor speed is increased as long as 'JOG left' or 'JOG right' are selected and until the left or right JOG frequency is reached. A0923 A0923 DI BOP JOG right P055 (0) "" "0" t USS on RS 232 USS on RS 485 Fieldbus "" JOG left P056 "0" (0) P082 P058 f t t P059 -P082 P060 P06 P060 P06 Dependency: P060 and P06 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging. Rounding times (P30 - P33), rounding type (P34) and P267 will also have influence on the JOG ramp. p059[0...2] JOG frequency left / JOG frequency <- G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Dependency: 0.00 [] [] 5.00 While JOG left is selected, this parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter will run. P060 and P06 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 59

160 .9 List of p060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time / JOG ramp-up time G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Sets jog ramp-up time. This is the time used while jogging is active. JOG f (Hz) f max (P082) P058 0 t up P060 t (s) t up = P058 P082 P060 Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows: P060 / P06 : JOG mode is active P20 / P2 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active P060 / P06 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P24 is active The rounding of P30 - P33 also applies to the JOG ramping. 60 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

161 .9 List of p06[0...2] JOG ramp-down time / JOG ramp-down time G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Sets ramp-down time. This is the time used while jogging is active. JOG f (Hz) f max (p082) p058 0 p06 t down t (s) t down = p058 p082 p06 Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows: P060 / P06 : JOG mode is active P20 / P2 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active P060 / P06 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P24 is active p070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Recommendation: Defines source of main setpoint. 755 = Analog input 0 setpoint 024 = Fixed frequency setpoint 050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 6

162 .9 List of p070[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2050: Defines source of main setpoint. 755 = Analog input 0 setpoint 024 = Fixed frequency setpoint 050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p07[0...2] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines source of the main setpoint scaling. 755 = Analog input 0 setpoint 024 = Fixed frequency setpoint p074[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) 050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Disables additional setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: Disable additional setpoint / Disab.add.setp Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Recommendation: Disables additional setpoint = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) 62 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

163 .9 List of p074[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP) G20 (CU240S) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: Disable additional setpoint / Disab.add.setp Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Disables additional setpoint = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p075[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint / Add. setpoint G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Defines source of the additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint). 755 = Analog input 0 setpoint 024 = Fixed frequency setpoint 050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p076[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint scaling / Add. setp.scal G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Defines source of scaling for additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 63

164 .9 List of Recommendation: = Scaling of.0 (00%) 755 = Analog input 0 Setpoint 024 = Fixed Frequency Setpoint 050 = MOP Setpoint [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r078 CO: Total frequency setpoint / Tot. freq.setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays sum of main and additional setpoints in [Hz]. r079 CO: Selected frequency setpoint / Sel. freq.setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays selected frequency setpoint. Dependency: Following frequency setpoints are displayed: r078 Total frequency setpoint P058 JOG frequency right P059 JOG frequency left P055 (BI: Enable JOG right) or P056 (BI: Enable JOG left) define command source of JOG right or JOG left respectively. P055 = 0 and P056 = 0 ==> Total frequency setpoint is selected. p080[0...2] Min. frequency / Min. frequency G20 Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: NO Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. The minimum frequency P080 represents a masking frequency of 0 Hz for all frequency target value sources e.g. AI,MOP,FF,USS with the exception of the JOG target value source (analogous to P09) Thus the frequency band +/- P080 is run through in optimum time by means of the acceleration/deceleration ramps. Dwelling in the frequency band is not possible (see example). Example: Furthermore, an overshoot of the actual frequency f_act upper min. frequency P080 is output by the signal function ( f_act > f_min, see below). 64 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

165 .9 List of Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for anticlockwise rotation. Under certain conditions (e.g. ramping, current limiting), motor can run below minimum frequency. p082[0...2] Max. frequency / Max. frequency G20 (CU240S) Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T 0.00 [] [] Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. Example: Dependency: Futhermore, the monitoring function f_act >= P082 (r0052 Bit0, see example below) is affected by this parameter. The maximal value of motor frequency P082 is limited to pulse frequency P800. P082 is dependent on the derating characteristic as followed: p800 2 khz 4 khz 6 khz 8-6 khz f max p Hz Hz Hz Hz The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active: - p335 0 (Slip compensation active ) : fmax(p335) = fmax + fslip, max = p082+ p r0330 p p200 0 (Flying restart active) : r0330 fmax(p200) = fmax + 2 fslip, nom = p p The resultant value is displayed in r084 (resultant maximum frequency). When using the setpoint source Analog Input USS the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754) a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r208[]) and the reference frequency P2000. If for example P082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterised with P0757 = 0 V, P0758 = 0 %, P0759 = 0 V, P0760 = 00 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 0 V of the analog input. Regeneration at rated frequncy is only possible, when the maximum frequency (p082) is higher than the rated frequency of the motor. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 65

166 .9 List of p082[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Max. frequency / Max. frequency Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T 0.00 [] [] Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. Example: Dependency: Futhermore, the monitoring function f_act >= P082 (r0052 Bit0, see example below) is affected by this parameter. The maximal value of motor frequency P082 is limited to pulse frequency P800. P082 is dependent on the derating characteristic as followed: p800 2 khz 4 khz 6 khz 8-6 khz f max p Hz Hz Hz Hz The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active: - p335 0 (Slip compensation active ) : fmax(p335) = fmax + fslip, max = p082+ p r0330 p p200 0 (Flying restart active) : r0330 fmax(p200) = fmax + 2 fslip, nom = p p The resultant value is displayed in r084 (resultant maximum frequency). When using the setpoint source Analog Input USS Fieldbus the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754) a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r208[]) and the reference frequency P2000. If for example P082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterised with P0757 = 0 V, P0758 = 0 %, P0759 = 0 V, P0760 = 00 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 0 V of the analog input. Regeneration at rated frequncy is only possible, when the maximum frequency (p082) is higher than the rated frequency of the motor. 66 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

167 .9 List of r084 Resultant max. frequency / Resultant max freq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays resultant maximum frequency. P300 < 20 P800 P800 6 khz r084 = min (P082,, ) 5 P800 8 khz r084 = min (P082, ) p r084 = min (p082, 5 p030, ) p09[0...2] Skip frequency / Skip frequency G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines skip frequency which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- P0 (skip frequency bandwidth). f out p09 Skip frequency p0 Skip frequency bandwidth f in Notice: Stationary operation is not possible within the suppressed frequency range; the range is merely passed through (on the ramp). For example, if P09 = 0 Hz and P0 = 2 Hz, it is not possible to operate continuously between 0 Hz +/- 2 Hz (i.e. between 8 and 2 Hz). The function is disabled if P09 = 0. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 67

168 .9 List of p092[0...2] Skip frequency 2 / Skip frequency 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines skip frequency 2 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- P0 (skip frequency bandwidth). See P09 (skip frequency ). p093[0...2] Skip frequency 3 / Skip frequency 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines skip frequency 3 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- P0 (skip frequency bandwidth). See P09 (skip frequency ). p094[0...2] Skip frequency 4 / Skip frequency 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines skip frequency 4 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- P0 (skip frequency bandwidth). See P09 (skip frequency ). p0[0...2] Skip frequency bandwidth / Skipfreq bandwidth G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] 0.00 [] 2.00 Delivers frequency bandwidth to be applied to skip frequencies (in [Hz]). See P09 (skip frequency ). 68 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

169 .9 List of p0[0...2] BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint / Inh. neg. setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 This parameter suppresses negative setpoints. Therefore, modification of the motor direction is inhibited to the setpoint channel. Recommendation: If a min. frequency (P080) and a negative setpoint are given, the motor is accelerated by a positive value in relationship to the min. frequency. 0 = Disabled = Enabled [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p3[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722: p3[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines source of reverse command used when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: Reverse / Reverse Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090: Defines source of reverse command used when P079 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source). [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r4 CO: Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl. / Setp<-dir.ctrl. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays setpoint frequency after change of direction. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 69

170 .9 List of r9 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays output frequency after modification by other functions, e.g.: P0 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint, P09 - P094 skip frequencies, P080 Min. frequency, P082 Max. frequency, limitations, etc. p20[0...2] Ramp-up time / Ramp-up time G20 Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P082) when no rounding is used. f (Hz) f max (P082) f 2 f t up P20 t (s) t up = f 2 f P082 P20 Dependency: Notice: Setting the ramp-up time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F000). Rounding times (P30 - P33) and rounding type (P34) will also have influence on the ramp. Ramp times will be used as follows: P060 / P06 : JOG mode is active P20 / P2 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active P060 / P06 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P24 is active If an external frequency setpoint with set ramp rates is used (e.g. from a PLC). The best way to achieve optimum drive performance is to set ramp times in P20 and P2 slightly shorter than those of the PLC. 70 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

171 .9 List of p2[0...2] Ramp-down time / Ramp-down time G20 Access level: P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P082) down to standstill when no rounding is used. f (Hz) f max (p082) f 2 f p2 t down t (s) tdown = f 2 f p082 p2 Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F000 / overvoltage F0002). Ramp times will be used as follows: P060 / P06 : JOG mode is active P20 / P2 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active P060 / P06 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P24 is active p24[0...2] BI: Enable JOG ramp times / Enable JOG ramp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Notice: Defines source for switching between jog ramp times (P060, P06) and normal ramp times (P20, P2) as applied to the RFG. This parameter is valid for normal mode (ON/OFF) only. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) P24 does not have any impact when JOG mode is selected. In this case, jog ramp times (P060, P06) will be used all the time. Ramp times will be used as follows: P060 / P06 : JOG mode is active P20 / P2 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active P060 / P06 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P24 is active Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 7

172 .9 List of p30[0...2] Ramp-up initial rounding time / Ramp-up ini. Trnd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines rounding time in seconds as shown on the diagram below. f f 2 f p30 p3 p32 p33 t t up t down where: Dependency Ramp-up time Ramp-down time always for - f p082 f 2 = for and for and p30+ p3 > p20 2 p32+ p33 > p2 2 p30+ p3 p20 2 p32+ p33 p2 2 p30+ p3 t up = + p20 2 p30+ p3 f 2 - f tup = ( + p20) 2 p082 p30+ p3 f 2 - f tup = + p20 2 p082 p32+ p33 t down = + p2 2 p32 + p33 f 2 - f tdown = ( + p2) 2 p082 p32+ p33 f 2 - f tdown = + p2 2 p082 Notice: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics. Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/ undershoot in the inverter response. If short or zero ramp times (P20, P2 < P30, P3, P32, P33) are set, the total ramp up time (t_up) or ramp down time (t_down) will not depend on P30. See equations above for valid conditions to calculate t_up and t_down. 72 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

173 .9 List of p3[0...2] Ramp-up final rounding time / Ramp-up final Trnd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Notice: Defines rounding time at end of ramp-up as shown in P30 (ramp-up initial rounding time). Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/ undershoot in the inverter response. Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics. p32[0...2] Ramp-down initial rounding time / Ramp-dwn ini. Trnd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Notice: Defines rounding time at start of ramp-down as shown in P30 (ramp-up initial rounding time). Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/ undershoot in the inverter response. Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics. p33[0...2] Ramp-down final rounding time / Ramp-dwn fin. Trnd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Notice: Defines rounding time at end of ramp-down as shown in P30 (ramp-up initial rounding time). Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/ undershoot in the inverter response. Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 73

174 .9 List of p34[0...2] Rounding type / Rounding type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Defines the smoothing which is active by setpoint modifications during acceleration or deceleration (e.g. new setpoint, OFF, OFF3, REV). This smoothing is applied, if the motor is ramped-up or ramped-down and P34 = 0, P32 > 0, P33 > 0 and the setpoint is not yet reached. p30 - p33 > 0 f f Set Setpoint reached p34 = 0 Setpoint not reached t f p30 p3 p32 p33 p30 p33 f Set Setpoint reached p34 = Setpoint not reached t ON p30 p3 p32 p33 p30 p33 OFF t Values: 0: Continuous smoothing : Discontinuous smoothing Dependency: No effect until P30 (Ramp-up initial rounding time) or P3 (Ramp-up final rounding time) or P32 (Rampdown initial rounding time) or P33 (Ramp-down final rounding time) > 0 s. 74 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

175 .9 List of p35[0...2] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 ramp-dwn time G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), U, T 0.00 [] [] 5.00 Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command. This time may be exceeded if the VDC_max. level is reached. p40[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Dependency: p40[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG output will be set immediately to 0. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. BI: RFG enable / RFG enable Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:4 Dependency: Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG output will be set immediately to 0. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p4[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Dependency: Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG output is held at it present value. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 75

176 .9 List of p4[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) BI: RFG start / RFG start Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:5 Dependency: Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG output is held at it present value. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p42[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Dependency: p42[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will be ramp-down to zero. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:6 Dependency: Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero than the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will be ramp-down to zero. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. r70 CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG / Setp. after RFG G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Displays overall frequency setpoint after ramp generator. 76 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

177 .9 List of p200 Flying start / Flying start G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the actual motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time. (f max + 2f slip nom) 'ramps to set point with normal ramp' fout t p202 I out t I dc t Vn as per V/f characteristic V out t 'motor speed found' Values: 0: Flying start disabled : Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint 2: Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direc 3: Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of se 4: Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint 5: Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direct 6: Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of set Notice: Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 77

178 .9 List of Useful for motors with high inertia loads. Settings to 3 search in both directions. Settings 4 to 6 search only in direction of setpoint. p202[0...2] Motor-current: Flying start / Mot. cur: Flystart G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 200 [] 00 Defines search current used for flying start. Value is in [%] based on rated motor current (P0305). Reducing the search current may improve performance for flying start if the inertia of the system is not very high. 78 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

179 .9 List of p203[0...2] Search rate: Flying start / SrchRate: Flystart G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 200 [] 00 Sets factor by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor. This value is entered in [%] defines the reciprocal initial gradient in the search sequence (see curve below). Parameter P203 influences the time taken to search for the motor frequency. r0330 fmax + 2 fslip,nom = p p f fsearch ms fmotor t t [ms] f p203 [%] = f [Hz] [Hz] 2 [%] [ms] slip,nom f = 2 [%] p203 [%] r0330 p The search time is the time taken to search through all frequencies between max. frequency P x f_slip to 0 Hz. Example: P203 = 00 % is defined as giving a rate of 2 % of f_slip,nom / [ms]. P203 = 200 % would result in a rate of frequency change of % of f_slip,nom / [ms]. For a motor with 50 Hz, 350 rpm, 00 % would produce a maximum search time of 600 ms. A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time. A lower value has the opposite effect. r204 Status word: Flying start V/f / Stat: Flystart V/f G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Bit parameter for checking and monitoring states during search, if V/f control mode is selected (see P300). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 79

180 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Current applied Yes No - 0 Current could not be applied Yes No - 02 Voltage reduced Yes No - 03 Slope-filter started Yes No - 04 Current less threshold Yes No - 05 Current-minimum Yes No - 07 Speed could not be found Yes No - r205 Status word: Flying start SLVC / Stat Flystart SLVC G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Bit parameter for checking status of flying start performed with n-adaption of observer. Parameter is only valid, if sensorless vector control (SLVC)) is selected (see P300). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Transformation active Yes No - 0 Initialize n-adaption Yes No - 02 Current applying Yes No - 03 N-controller closed Yes No - 04 Isd-controller open Yes No - 05 RFG hold Yes No - 06 N-adaption set to zero Yes No - 07 reserved Yes No - 08 reserved Yes No - 09 reserved Yes No - 0 Direction Positive Yes No - Search is started Yes No - 2 Current is applied Yes No - 3 Search is aborted Yes No - 4 Deviation is zero Yes No - 5 N-controller is active Yes No - p20 Automatic restart / Automatic restart G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 6 Configures automatic restart function Values: 0: Disabled : Trip reset after power on, P2 disabled 2: Restart after mains blackout, P2 disabled 3: Restart after mains brownout or fault, P2 enabled 4: Restart after mains brownout, P2 enabled 5: Restart after mains blackout and fault, P2 disabled 6: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P2 enabled Dependency: Automatic restart requires constant ON command via a digital input wire link. Caution: P20 > 2 can cause the motor to restart automatically without toggling the ON command! 80 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

181 .9 List of Notice: A "mains brownout" is where the power in interrupted and re-applied before the display on the BOP (if one is fitted to the inverter) has gone dark (a very short mains break where the DC link has not fully collapsed). A "mains blackout" is a long mains break, where the DC link has fully collapsed before the power is re-applied. "Delay Time" is the time between attempts of quitting fault. The "Delay Time" of first attempt is second, then it will be double every next attempt. "Number of Restart Attempts" is the number of restarts the inverter will try to quit fault. When faults are quit and after 4 seconds of no fault condition, "Number of Restart Attempts" will be reset to P2 and "Delay Time" will be reset to second. P20 = 0: Automatic restart is disabled. P20 = : The inverter will acknowledge (reset) faults i.e. it will reset a fault when the is re-applied. This means the inverter must be fully powered down, a brownout is not sufficed. The inverter will not run until the ON command has been toggled. P20 = 2: The inverter will acknowledge the fault F0003 at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). P20 = 3: For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the faults (F0003, etc.). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or bronwout. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). P20 = 4: For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the fault (F0003). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or bronwout. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). P20 = 5: The inverter will acknowledge the faults F0003 etc. at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). P20 = 6: The inverter will acknowledge the faults (F0003 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the drive. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). Setting 6 causes the motor to restart immediately. Following table presents an overview of parameter P20 and its functionality. p20 ON always active (permanent) ON in no-voltage condition Fault F0003 on All other faults on All faults on No faults on Blackout Brownout Blackout Brownout Blackout Blackout 0 Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. 2 + restart Restart 3 Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl restart restart restart restart restart 4 Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. + + restart restart Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl restart restart restart Restart 6 Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl restart restart restart restart restart Restart Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 8

182 .9 List of driven by the load (P200). p2 Number of restart attempts / Restart attempts G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: C2, U, T Specifies number of times inverter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P20 is activated. 82 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

183 .9 List of p25 Holding brake enable / MHB enable G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, T 0 0 Enables/disables holding brake function. The mechanical motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via the signal of status word r0052 Bit2 "motor holding brake ative". The brake relay opens at point and closes at point 2. This signal can be issued via: digitial outputs (e.g. DO0: ==> P073 = 52.C (r0052 Bit2)) status word of the serial interface (e.g. USS) ON / OFF/OFF3: ON OFF/OFF3 Motor excitation finished r0056 Bit04 t t f P0346 fmin (P080) t P26 P27 r0052 Bit2 Point Point 2 0 t Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 83

184 .9 List of ON / OFF2: OFF2 Inactive Active ON OFF/OFF3 Motor excitation finished r0056 Bit04 f P0346 t t t fmin (P080) t r0052 Bit2 0 P26 t Values: 0: Motor holding brake disabled : Motor holding brake enabled Caution: It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as working brake, as it is generally only designed for a limited number of emergeny braking operations. In V/f control (P300 < 20) a typical value of min. frequency P080 for motor holding brake is the slip frequency of the motor r0330. In a vector control mode (P300 = 20 or P300 = 2) The value of the min. Frequency P080 should be zero. The delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P0494 > P26 and P494 > P27 ) The delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P278 > P26 and P278 > P27 ) Otherwise there may be encoder loss trips when the brake is applied and pulses are enabled. p26 Holding brake release delay / MHB release delay G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, T 0.0 [] 20.0 [] 0. Defines period during which inverter runs at min. frequency P080 before ramping up at point (as shown in P25 - holding brake enable). Inverter starts at min. frequency P080 on this profile, i.e. it does not use a ramp. 84 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

185 .9 List of A typical value of min. frequency P080 for this type of application is the slip frequency of the motor. You can calculate the rated slip frequency by using the following formula: fslip[hz] = r P030 = nsyn nn fn nsyn See diagram P25 (holding brake enable). p27 Holding time after ramp down / Thold. <- ramp-dwn G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, T 0.0 [] 20.0 [] 0. Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (P080) after ramping down at point 2. See diagram P25 (holding brake enable). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 85

186 .9 List of p230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external input signal is active. DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft stationary). When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized. BI: Enable DC brk. p230.c (0:0) 0 f f* DC braking f_set t f_act i p0347 t DC braking active t r0053 Bit00 0 DC brake can be applied in drive states r0002 =, 4, 5 t Dependency: Caution: The level of DC braking is set in P232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 00 % by default. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time! Notice: DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2). This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur. 86 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

187 .9 List of p230[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk. Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external input signal is active. When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized. BI: Enable DC brk. p230.c (0:0) 0 f f* DC braking f_set t f_act i p0347 t DC braking active t r0053 Bit00 0 DC brake can be applied in drive states r0002 =, 4, 5 t DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft stationary). Recommendation: Dependency: The level of DC braking is set in P232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 00 % by default = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 87

188 .9 List of Caution: With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time! Notice: p230[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2). This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur. BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk. Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external input signal is active. DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft stationary). When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized. BI: Enable DC brk. p230.c (0:0) 0 f f* DC braking f_set t f_act i p0347 t DC braking active t r0053 Bit00 0 DC brake can be applied in drive states r0002 =, 4, 5 t The level of DC braking is set in P232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 00 % by default. 88 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

189 .9 List of Recommendation: Dependency: Caution: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time! Notice: DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2). This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur. p232[0...2] DC braking current / DC braking current G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 250 [] 00 Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). The DC Brake (DC Injection Brake) can be issued observing the following dependencies: OFF / OFF3 ==> see P233 BICO ==> see P230 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 89

190 .9 List of p233[0...2] Duration of DC braking / DC brak. duration G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines duration for which DC injection braking is to be active following an OFF or OFF3 command. When an OFF or OFF3 command is received by the drive, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz. When the output frequency reaches the value set in P234, the drive injects a DC braking current P232 for the time duration set in P233. ON OFF/OFF3 OFF2 f P0347 t t P234 OFF2 DC braking DC braking active t r0053 Bit00 0 P233 t 2 ON OFF/OFF3 OFF2 f P0347 t t P234 OFF ramp OFF2 DC braking DC braking active OFF2 t r0053 Bit00 0 P233 t Parameter P232 still controls the level of DC injection. 90 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

191 .9 List of Caution: With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time! DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2). Notice: The DC braking function causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current. When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized (demagnetization time is calculated automatically from motor data). P233 = 0 : not active. P233 = : active for the specified duration. p234[0...2] DC braking start frequency / DC brk. start freq G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T 0.00 [] [] Sets start frequency for DC braking. When an OFF or OFF3 command is received by the drive, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz. When the output frequency reaches the value set in start frequency of DC braking P234, the drive injects a DC braking current P232 for the time duration set in P233. See P232 (DC braking current) and P233 (duration of DC braking) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 9

192 .9 List of p236[0...2] Compound braking current / Compound brk. cur. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 250 [] 0 Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exeeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). If p254 = 0 : Compound braking switch-on level otherwise : Compound braking switch-on level UDC_Comp =.3 U DC_Comp = 0.98 r242 2 Vmains=.3 2 p020 The Compound Brake is an overlay of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (effective braking at the ramp) after OFF or OFF3. This enables braking with controlled motor frequency and a minimum of energy returned to the motor. Through optimization of the ramp-down time and the compound braking an efficient braking without additional HW components is possible. f p236 = 0 Without Compound braking f_set f p236 > 0 With Compound braking f_set f_act f_act t t i i t t u DC-link u DC-link U DC_Comp t t Dependency: Compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold above). This will happen on OFF, OFF3 and any regenerative condition. It is disabled, when: DC braking is active Flying start is active Vector mode (SLVC, VC) is selected 92 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

193 .9 List of Notice: Increasing the value will generally improve braking performance; however, if you set the value too high, an overcurrent trip may result. If used with dynamic braking enabled as well compound braking will take priority. If used with the Vdc max controller enabled the drive behaviour whilst braking may be worsened paticularly with high values of compound braking. Compound braking does not work when the drive is in vector control. P236 = 0 : Compound braking disabled. P236 = : Level of DC braking current defined as a [%] of rated motor current (P0305). p237 Dynamic braking / Dynamic braking G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T Dynamic braking absorbs the braking energy. This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor (chopper resistor). Dynamic braking is active when the function is enabled and DC-link voltage exeeds the dynamic braking switch-on level, see below. Dynamic braking switch-on level If p254 = 0 : VDC,Chopper=.3 2 Vmains=.3 otherwise : VDC, Chopper = 0.98 r242 2 p020 Values: 0: Disabled : 5 % duty cycle 2: 0 % duty cycle 3: 20 % duty cycle 4: 50 % duty cycle 5: 00 % duty cycle Dependency: If used with DC braking enabled as well compound braking will take priority. DC braking p233 > 0? no Compound braking p236 > 0? no Dynamic braking p237 > 0? no yes yes yes DC braking enabled Compound braking enabled Dynamic braking enabled disabled Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 93

194 .9 List of Notice: Initially the brake will operate at a high duty cycle dependant on the DC link level until the thermal limit is approached. The duty cycle specified by this parameter will then be imposed. The resistor should be able to operate at this level indefinitely without overheating. Chopper resistor MM4 B+ B- ~ ~ = Chopper control = ~ V DC V DC, act t V DC, Chopper t Chopper, ON Chopper active t t Chopper = f Chopper = 2000Hz t t V DC, act 00 % V V 0 x t Chopper, ON x = t Chopper 00 V DC, Chopper 0 p237 Duty cycle monitoring 0 Alarm A0535 Mains V V 9.8 V V 7.0 V V 2.3 V The threshold for the warning A0535 is equivalent to 0 seconds running at 95 % duty cycle. The duty cycle will be limited when it was running 2 seconds at 95 % duty cycle. 94 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

195 .9 List of p240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller / Vdc controller G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, T 0 3 Enables / disables Vdc controller. The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia systems. Values: 0: Vdc controller disabled : Vdc-max controller enabled 2: Kinetic buffering (Vdc-min controller) enabled 3: Vdc-max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled Caution: If P245 increased too much, it may interfere with the drive normal operation. Vdc max controller automatically increases ramp-down times to keep the DC-link voltage (r0026) within limits (r242). Enables/Disables VdcMin controller. Vdc min is activated if DC-link voltage falls below the switch on level,p245. The kinetic energy of the motor is then used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the drive. If the drive trips F0003 immediately, try increasing the dynamic factor first, P247. If still tripping F0003 try then increasing the switch on level, P245. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 95

196 .9 List of r242 CO: Switch-on level of Vdc-max / Vdc-max ON lev G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Displays switch-on level of Vdc max controller. V DC r242 V DC_max r0056 Bit4 0 -controller active f A09 t t f act f set t Following equation is only valid, if p254 = 0 : r242 =.5 2 Vmains=.5 otherwise : r242 is internally calculated 2 p020 p243[0...2] Dynamic factor of Vdc-max / Vdc-max dyn. fact. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 200 [] 00 Defines dynamic factor for DC link controller in [%]. Dependency: P243 = 00 % means parameters P250, P25 and P252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P243 (dynamic factor of Vdc-max). Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data. 96 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

197 .9 List of p245[0...2] Switch on level kin. buffering / KIB ON level G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 65 [] 5 [] 76 Enter switch-on level for kinetic buffering (KIB) in [%] relative to supply voltage (P020). p245 [V] = p245 [%] 00 2 p020 Warning: Increasing the value too much, may interfere with the drive normal operation. Changing P254 doesn't affect the switch-on-level for KIB. r246[0...2] CO: Switch-on level kin buffering / KIB ON level G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Displays switch-on level of kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc min controller). If the value of p246 drops below the value set in p245, kinetic buffering will be activated, that means the motor frequency will be reduced in order to keep Vdc within the valid range. If there is not enough regenerative energy, the converter trips with undervoltage. p247[0...2] Dyn. factor of kinetic buffering / Dyn. factor of KIP G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, U, T 0 [] 200 [] 00 Enters dynamic factor for kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc-min controller). P247 = 00 % means parameters P250, P25 and P252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P247 (dynamic factor of Vdc-min). Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data. p250[0...2] Gain of Vdc-controller / Gain of Vdc ctrl. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T Enters gain for Vdc controller. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 97

198 .9 List of p25[0...2] Integration time Vdc-controller / Int. time Vdc ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T 0. [] [] 40.0 Enters integral time constant for Vdc controller. p252[0...2] Differential time Vdc-controller / Diff.time Vdc ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T 0.0 [] [].0 Enters differential time constant for Vdc controller. p253[0...2] Vdc-controller output limitation / Vdc ctrl outp. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: C2, U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Limits maximum effect of Vdc max controller. p254 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels / Autodet Vdc ON lev G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, T 0 Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc max controller. Values: 0: Disabled : Enabled 98 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

199 .9 List of p256[0...2] Reaction of kinetic buffering / Reaction of KIB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: C2, T Enters reaction for kinetic buffering controller (Vdc-min controller). Depending on the setting selected, the frequency limit defined in P257 is used to either hold the speed or disable pulses. If not enough regeneration is produced, drive may trip undervoltage. Values: 0: Maintain DC-link until trip : Maintain DC-link until trip / stop 2: Control stop Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 99

200 .9 List of P256 = 0: Maintain dclink voltage until mains is returned or drive is tripped undervoltage. The frequency is kept above the frequency limit provided in P257. V DC p245 V DC_min f t p257 Pulse enabled 0 t t P256 = : Maintain dclink voltage until mains is returned or drive is tripped undervoltage or pulses disabled when frequency falls below the limit in P257. V DC p245 V DC_min f t p257 Pulse enabled 0 t t P256 = 2: This option ramps down the frequency to stand still even when mains return. If mains does not return, frequency brought down under the control of vdc-min controller until P257 limit then pulses disabled or undervoltage has occurred. If mains return, then an OFF is active until P257 limit then pulses disabled. V DC p245 V DC_min f t p257 Pulse enabled 0 OFF OFF2 t t 200 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

201 .9 List of p257[0...2] Freq limit for kinetic buffering / Freq limit for KIB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 2.50 Frequency which kinetic buffering (KIB) either hold speed or disable pulses depending on P256. p300[0...2] Control mode / Control mode G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Parameter to select the control methode. Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage supplied by inverter as illustrated in the diagram below. V V n V V max r007 V n p0304 p300 = 3 p300 = 0 p325 p323 p300 = 2 p32 p30 0 f n f f0 0 Hz f p320 f2 p322 f3 p324 f n p030 f max p082 f Values: 0: V/f with linear characteristic : V/f with FCC 2: V/f with quadratic characteristic 3: V/f with programmable characteristic 4: reserved 5: V/f for textile applications 6: V/f with FCC for textile applications 9: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint 20: Sensorless vector control 2: Vector control with sensor 22: Sensorless vector torque-control 23: Vector torque-control with sensor Dependency: See parameter P0205, P0500 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 20

202 .9 List of Caution: When commissioning Vector Control with encoder-feedback (VC), the drive should be configured for V/f mode (see P300) first. Run the drive and compare r006 with r002 that should agree in sign and magnitude (with a deviation of only a few percent). Only if both criteria are fullfilled, change P300 and select VC (P300 = 2 or 23). P0400 = (single channel encoder) will only allow operation in one direction. If operation in both directions is required, connect an encoder with 2 channels (A and B) and select setting 2. See the Operating Instructions of the encoder module for more information. 202 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

203 .9 List of P300 = : V/f with FCC (flux current control) Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency. If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies. P300 = 2 : V/f with a quadratic characteristic Suitable for centrifugal fans / pumps P300 = 3 : V/f with a programmable characteristic User defined characteristic (see P320) For synchronous motors (e.g. SIEMOSYN motors) P300 = 5,6 : V/f for textil applications Slip compensation disabled. Imax controller modifies the output voltage only. Imax controller does not influence the output frequency. P300 = 9 : V/f control with independent voltage setpoint The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modify in relationship to P300 dependencies: ParNo. Parameter name Level V/f SLVC VC p300 = p300[3] Control mode 2 x x x x x x x x x x x p30[3] Continuous boost 2 x x x x x x x p3[3] Acceleration boost 2 x x x x x x x p32[3] Starting boost 2 x x x x x x x p36[3] Boost end frequency 3 x x x x x x x p320[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 x p32[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 x p322[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 3 x p323[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 3 x p324[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 3 x p325[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 3 x p330[3] CI: Voltage setpoint 3 x p333[3] Start frequency for FCC 3 x x p335[3] Slip compensation 2 x x x x p336[3] CO: U/f Slip limit 2 x x x x p338[3] Resonance damping gain V/f 3 x x x x p340[3] Imax freq. controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x p34[3] Imax controller integral time 3 x x x x x x x p345[3] Imax controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x p346[3] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time 3 x x x x x x x p350[3] Voltage soft start 3 x x x x x x x Sensorless vector control (SLVC, P300 = 20,22) and vector control (VC, P300 = 2,23): SLVC can provide excellent performance for the following types of application: Applications which require high torque performance Applications which require fast respond to shock loading Applications which require torque holding while passing through 0 Hz Applications which require very accurate speed holding Applications which require motor pull out protection Restrictions: SLVC / VC is dependent on the accuracy of the motor model being used and the measurements being performed by the inverter. There are therefore certain restrictions on the use of SLVC / VC: Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 203

204 .9 List of f max = min(200 Hz, 5 p030) 4 p0305 r0209 r0207 r0207 no synchronuos motor (max. frequency) (ratio of rated motor current to rated inverter current ) Recommended means of commissioning: For correct operation under SLVC / VC control it is imperative that the name plate data of the motor (P P030) is correctly entered and that the motor data identification (P90) must be carried out on a cold motor. It is also necessary to ensure that the motor ambient temperature is correctly entered in P0625 if this is significantly different from the default value of 20 C. This must be done after the quick commissioning has been completed (P3900) but before the motor data identification measurements are carried out. Optimisation: The following parameters can be adjusted by the user to improve performance. P0003 = 3 P0342: Total / motor inertia ratio Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC): P470: P gain (SLVC) P472: I term (SLVC) P60: Continuous torque boost (SLVC, open loop boost) P750: Control word of motor model Vector Control (VC): P460: P gain P462: I term The following table presents an overview of control parameters (SLVC, VC) that can be modify in relationship to P300 dependencies: 204 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

205 .9 List of ParNo. Parameter name Level V/f SLVC VC P300 = P400[3] Configuration of speed control 3 x P442[3] Filter time for act. speed 3 x P452[3] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) 3 x P460[3] Gain speed controller 2 x P462[3] Integral time speed controller 2 x P470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) 2 x P472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) 2 x P477[3] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. 3 x x P478[3] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. 3 x x P488[3] Droop input source 3 x x P489[3] Droop scaling 3 x x P492[3] Enable droop 3 x x P496[3] Scaling accel. precontrol 3 x x P499[3] Scaling accel. torque control 3 x P500[3] Selection of torque setpoint 2 x x x x P50[3] BI: Change to torque control 3 x x x x P503[3] CI: Torque setpoint 3 x x P5[3] CI: Additional torque setpoint 3 x x x x P520[3] CO: Upper torque limit 2 x x x x P52[3] CO: Lower torque limit 2 x x x x P522[3] CI: Upper torque limit 3 x x x x P523[3] CI: Lower torque limit 3 x x x x P525[3] Scaling lower torque limit 3 x x x x P530[3] Motoring power limitation 2 x x x x P53[3] Regenerative power limitation 2 x x x x P570[3] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint 2 x x x x P574[3] Dynamic voltage headroom 3 x x x x P580[3] Efficiency optimization 2 x x x x P582[3] Smooth time for flux setpoint 3 x x x x P596[3] Int. time field weak. controller 3 x x x x P60[3] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) 2 x x P6[3] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) 2 x x P740 Gain for oscillation damping 3 x x P750[3] Control word of motor model 3 x x x x P755[3] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 x x P756[3] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 x x P758[3] T(wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode 3 x x P759[3] T(wait) for n-adaption to settle 3 x x P764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) 3 x x P780[3] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption 3 x x P0400[3] Select encoder type 2 x x P0408[3] Encoder pulses per revolution 2 x x P049[3] Reaction on speed signal loss 2 x x P0492[3] Allowed speed difference 2 x x P0494[3] Delay speed loss reaction 2 x x ) If the speed control (main setpoint) is selected a torque setpoint is available via the additional setpoint channel. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 205

206 .9 List of p30[0...2] Continuous boost / Continuous boost G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 50.0 At low output frequencies the output voltage is low to keep the flux level constant. However, the output voltage may be too low for magnetisation the asynchronous motor to hold the load to overcome losses in the system. The inverter output voltage can be increased via P30 for the compensation of losses, hold loads at 0 Hz or maintain the magnetization Defines boost level in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f curves according to the diagram below: V Boost voltage Linear V/f Vmax Validity range Vn (p0304) V ConBoost,00 actual V V ConBoost,50 Boost Output voltage Normal V/f (p300 = 0) ON OFF f p30 active 0 t t t f Boost,end 0 fn (p36) (p030) f max (p082) f V Vmax Vn (p0304) V ConBoost,00 0 actual V V ConBoost,50 f Boost,end (p36) Boost voltage Boost Output voltage Normal quadratic (p300 = 2) fn (p030) Quadratic V/f fmax (p082) ON OFF f p30 active f 0 Validity range t t t 206 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

207 .9 List of where voltage values are given VConBoost, 00 V ConBoost,50 = = p0305 p0350 VConBoost,00 2 p30 00 Dependency: Continous boost P30 has no effect during vector operation. Increasing the boost levels increases motor heating (especially at standstill). The boost values are combined when continuous boost (P30) used in conjunction with other boost parameters (acceleration boost P3 and starting boost P32). However priorities are allocated to these parameters as follows: P30 > P3 > P32 The total boost is limited by following equation: V Boost 3 R I s Mot = 3 p0305 p0350 Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost: VBoost P0305 P0350 P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 207

208 .9 List of p3[0...2] Acceleration boost / Acceleration boost G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 P3 will only produce boost during ramping, and is therefore useful for additional torque during acceleration and deceleration. As opposed to parameter P32, which is only active on the first acceleration issued after the ON command, parameter P3 is always effect during an acceleration and deceleration when issued, if the condition below is not violated. Applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops back out once the setpoint is reached. V Boost voltage Validity range Vmax Vn (p0304) V AccBoost,00 V AccBoost,50 actual V Boost 0 f Boost,end fn (p36) (p030) where voltage values are given Output voltage Normal V/f (p300 = 0) fmax (p082) ON OFF f p3 active f 0 t t t V AccBoost, 00 V AccBoost,5 0 = = p0305 P0350 V AccBoost,00 2 p3 00 Dependency: Acceleration boost P3 has no effect during vector operation. See parameter P30 p32[0...2] Starting boost / Starting boost G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Applies a constant linear offset (in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current)) to active V/f curve (either linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until 9. ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively 208 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

209 .9 List of 20. setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output This is useful for starting loads with high inertia. Setting the starting boost (P32) too high will cause the inverter to limit the current, which will in turn restrict the output frequency to below the setpoint frequency. V Boost voltage Validity range Vmax Vn (p0304) V StartBoost,00 V StartBoost,50 actual V Boost 0 f Boost,end fn (p36) (p030) where voltage values are given Output voltage Normal V/f (p300 = 0) fmax (p082) ON OFF f p32 active f 0 t t t VStartBoost, 00 V StartBoost,50 = = p0305 p0350 V StartBoost,00 2 p32 00 Example: Dependency: Setpoint = 50Hz. Ramping up with starting boost. During ramp up, setpoint changed to 20Hz. As soon as setpoint changed, starting boost removed because setpoint smaller than present ramp output. Starting boost P32 has no effect during vector operation. See parameter P30 r35 CO: Total boost voltage / Total boost V G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays total value of voltage boost (in volts). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 209

210 .9 List of p36[0...2] Boost end frequency / Boost end freq. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 00.0 [] 20.0 Defines point at which programmed boost reaches 50 % of its value. This value is expressed in [%] relative to P030 (rated motor frequency). The default frequency is defined as follows: f = 2 ( 53 Boost min + motor P 3) The expert user may change this value to alter the shape of the curve, e.g. to increase torque at a particular frequency. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data. See diagram in P30 (continuous boost). 20 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

211 .9 List of p320[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. / V/f freq. coord. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Sets V/f coordinates (P320/32 to P324/325) to define V/f characteristic. V V max r007 V max = f(v dc, M max ) V n p0304 p325 p323 p32 p30 f0 0 Hz f p320 f2 p322 f3 p324 f n p030 f max p082 f p30[%] r0395[%] p30[v] = p0304[v] 00[%] 00[%] p30[%] r0395[%] p30[v] = p0304[v] 00[%] 00[%] Example: Dependency: Sets V/f coordinates (P320/32 to P324/325) to define V/f characteristic. This parameter can be used to provide correct torque at correct frequency and is useful when used with synchronous motors. To set parameter, select P300 = 3 (V/f with programmable characteristic). Linear interpolation will be applied between the individual data points. V/f with programmable characteristic (P300 = 3) has 3 programmable points. The two non-programmable points are: Continuous boost P30 at zero 0 Hz Rated motor voltage P0304 at rated motor frequency P030 The acceleration boost and starting boost defined in P3 and P32 are applied to V/f with programmable characteristic. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 2

212 .9 List of p32[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. / V/f volt. coord. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 See P320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. ). p322[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 / V/f freq. coord. 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 See P320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. ). p323[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 / V/f volt. coord. 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 See P320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. ). p324[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 / V/f freq. coord. 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 See P320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. ). p325[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 / V/f volt. coord. 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 See P320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. ). 22 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

213 .9 List of p330[0...2] CI: Voltage setpoint / Voltage setp. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 BICO parameter for selecting source of voltage setpoint for independent V/f control. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p333[0...2] Start frequency for FCC / Start freq for FCC G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 00.0 [] 0.0 Notice: Defines start frequency at which FCC (flux current control) is enabled as [%] of rated motor frequency (P030). If this value is too low, the system may become unstable. p334[0...2] Slip compensation activation range / Slip c. act. range G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T.0 [] 20.0 [] 6.0 To set the frequency activation range for slip compensation. The percentage value of P334 refers to the motor rated frequency P030. The upper threshold will always stay 4% above P334. Dependency: Slip compensation (P335) active. See parameter P335. The starting frequency of the slip compensation is P334 * P030. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 23

214 .9 List of p335[0...2] Slip compensation / Slip compensation G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor load. In the V/f-control, the motor speed will always be less than the command speed due to the slip speed. For a given speed command, the speed will drop as load is increased. The speed regulation of drive can be improved by the technique known as slip compensation. Increasing the load from M to M2 (see diagram) will decrease the motor speed from f to f2, due to the slip. The inverter can compensate for this by increasing the output frequency slightly as the load increases. An increase of the output frequency from f_out_m to f_out_m2 will result in a motor speed at f for load M2. The inverter measures the current and increases the output frequency to compensate for the expected slip. P335 can be used to enable and fine-tune the slip compensation. Without slip compensation M M With slip compensation M2 M2 M M f f 2 f f f f 2 f f out M2 f out M f Notice: The applied value of the slip compensation (scaled by P335) is limited by following equation: p f Slip_comp_max p333 f Slip_comp_ max = p336 r f Slip_act r0065 f set r078 Setpoint channel f act r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

215 .9 List of P335 = 0 % : Slip compensation disabled. P335 = 50 % - 70 % : Full slip compensation at cold motor (partial load). P335 = 00 % : Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load). Range of slip compensation : % P335 f out f N with slip compensation without slip compensation P334 P % 00 % f out f N P334 P % f set f N Gain adjustment enables fine-tuning of the actual motor speed (see P460 - gain speed control). 00% = standard setting for warm stator. p336[0...2] Slip limit / Slip limit G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Dependency: 0 [] 600 [] 250 Compensation slip limit in [%] relative to r0330 (rated motor slip), which is added to frequency setpoint. Slip compensation (P335) active. r337 CO: V/f slip frequency / V/f slip freq. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual compensated motor slip as [%] Dependency: Slip compensation (P335) active. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 25

216 .9 List of p338[0...2] Resonance damping gain V/f / Res.damp. gain V/f G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines resonance damping gain for V/f. Here, di/dt of the acitve current will be scaled by P338 (see diagram below). If di/dt increases the resonance damping circuit decreases the inverter output frequency. p338 i active - p338 T f res damping The resonance circuit damps oscillations of the active current which frequently occur during no-load operation. In V/f modes (see P300), the resonance damping circuit is active in a range from approx. 6 % to 80 % of rated motor frequency (P030). If the value of P338 is too high, this will cause instability (forward control effect). p340[0...2] Imax controller prop. gain / Imax ctrl prp gain G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Proportional gain of the I_max controller. The Imax controller reduces inverter current if the output current exceeds the maximum motor current (r0067). In linear V/f, parabolic V/f, FCC, and programmable V/f modes the I_max controller uses both a frequency controller (see parameters P340 and P34) and a voltage controller (see parameters P345 and P346). The frequency controller seeks to reduce current by limiting the inverter output frequency (to a minimum of the two times nominal slip frequency). If this action does not successfully remove the overcurrent condition, the inverter output voltage is reduced using the I_max voltage controller. When the overcurrent condition has been removed successfully, frequency limiting is removed using the ramp-up time set in P20. In linear V/f for textiles, FCC for textiles, or external V/f modes only the I_max voltage controller is used to reduce current (See parameters P345 and P346). 26 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

217 .9 List of The I_max controller can be disabled by setting the frequency controller integral time P34 to zero. This disables both the frequency and voltage controllers. Note that when disabled, the I_max controller will take no action to reduce current but overcurrent warnings will still be generated, and the Drive will trip in excessive overcurrent or overload conditions. p34[0...2] Imax controller integral time / Imax ctrl int time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Integral time constant of the I_max controller. P34 = 0 : I_max controller disabled P340 = 0 and P34 > 0 : frequency controller enhanced integral P340 > 0 and P34 > 0 : frequency controller normal PI control See parameter P340 for further information. r343 CO: Imax controller freq. output / Imax ctrl Foutp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays effective frequency limitation. Dependency: If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P082. r344 CO: Imax controller volt. output / Imax ctrl Voutp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage. p345[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain / Imax volt prp gain G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T If the output current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the frequency inverter is dynamically controlled by reducing the output voltage. This parameter sets the proportional gain of this controller. See parameter P340 for further information. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 27

218 .9 List of p346[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time / Imax volt int time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller. P34 = 0 : I_max controller disabled P345 = 0 and P346 > 0 : I_max voltage controller enhanced integral P345 > 0 and P346 > 0 : I_max voltage controller normal PI control See parameter P340 for further information. p350[0...2] Voltage soft start / Voltage soft start G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Sets whether voltage is built up smoothly during magnetization time (ON) or whether it simply jumps to boost voltage (OFF). p350 p0346 V V/f characteristic f t p0346 Softstart V f f Values: 0: OFF : ON 28 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

219 .9 List of The settings for this parameter bring benefits and drawbacks: P350 = 0: OFF (jump to boost voltage) Benefit: flux is built up quickly Drawback: motor may move P350 = : ON (smooth voltage build-up) Benefit: motor less likely to move Drawback: flux build-up takes longer p400[0...2] Configuration of speed control / Config. of n-ctrl. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T bin Configuration for speed control. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Automatic Kp adaption Yes No - 0 Integral freeze (SLVC) Yes No - P400 Bit 00 = : Automatic gain adaption of speed controller (P460 resp. P470) is enabled. In the area of field weakening the gain is reduced in dependence on flux. Kp f(φ) f N P400 Bit0 = : The integrator of the speed controller is frozen if Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC) is selected and the control is switched from closed-loop to open-loop operation. Advantage: The correct amount of slip compensation is calculated and applied to the open-loop function for a motor under load. r407 CO/BO: Status 2 of motor control / Stat 2 ctrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of motor control, which can be used to diagnose inverter status. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 29

220 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 V/f control enabled Yes No - 0 SLVC enabled Yes No - 02 Torque control enabled Yes No - 05 Stop I-comp. speed control Yes No - 06 Set I-comp. speed controller Yes No - 08 Upper torque limit active Yes No - 09 Lower torque limit active Yes No - 0 Droop active Yes No - 5 DDS change active Yes No - See P052 (CO/BO: Status word ) r438 CO: Freq. setpoint to controller / Freq. setp ctl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays setpoint of speed controller. p442[0...2] Filter time for act. speed / Filter time n_act. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T [] [] 2 Sets time constant of PT filter to smooth actual speed of speed controller. r445 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt freq G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays filtered actual speed at speed controller input. p452[0...2] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) / Act.spd.filt. SLVC G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T [] [] 2 Sets time constant of PT filter to filter the speed deviation of speed controller in operation mode SLVC (sensorless vector control). p460[0...2] Gain speed controller / Gain of n-ctrl. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

221 .9 List of p462[0...2] Integral time speed controller / Tn of n-ctrl. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 25 [] 3200 [] 400 p470[0...2] Gain speed controller (SLVC) / Gain n-ctrl (SLVC) G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Enters gain of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC). r ms p488 p489 Droop p p496 p034 p0342 Precontrol r58 p470 p472 r70 r084 *) r438 Kp Tn Freq. setpoint r0063 p452 r0064 r508 Torque setpoint r0079 Act. frequency from observer model *) only active, if pre-control is enabled (p496 > 0) p472[0...2] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) / Tn of n-ctrl. SLVC G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 25 [] 3200 [] 400 Enters integral time of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 22

222 .9 List of p477[0...2] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. / Set integrator G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p478[0...2] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. / Set int. value G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Notice: Selects source for integral part of speed controller. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Neither function works after flying start. If the P482 (integral component of speed controller) is connected and the setting command is not connected (P477=0), upon pulse enable the integral component of the controller is set once to the last value prior the pulse inhibit. r482 CO: Integral output of n-ctrl. / Int.outp n-ctrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays integral part of speed controller output. 222 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

223 .9 List of p488[0...2] Droop input source / Droop input source G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects source of droop input signal. With mechanically coupled motors it is very important that an even load distribution is applied to each motor. The load sharing can be achieved by enabling the droop function on both inverters. CO: Droop freq. [Hz] r490 Droop scaling p489.d (0.05) Droop input source p488.d (0) Enable droop 0... p492.d (0) 0 Precontrol 3 r538 r482 r70 Freq. setpoint r0063 Act. frequency *) Filter Filter PI Speed controller r539 r538 r539 r538 r539 r508 Torque setpoint r0079 *) only active, if pre-control is enabled (P496 > 0) 2. Droop is applied as a frequency setpoint on each inverter. The droop increases the slip via the negative feedback of the torque setpoint to the frequency setpoint. In a steady-state an even load distribution can be achieved if the slip characteristics are identical. 22. Droop can act as a setpoint or limitation for a group of inverters (i.e. master-slave inverters). By use of the master-slave inverter technique an even load distribution is achieved across the whole application. This is accomplished by setting the torque setpoint (r490) on the master inverter which then controls the speed of the master inverter and all connected slave inverters. Values: 0: Droop input disabled : Torque setpoint 2: Speed controller output 3: Speed controller integral output Dependency: Droop scaling (P489) must be > 0 for droop to be effective. p489[0...2] Droop scaling / Droop scaling G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines amount of droop in per unit at full load in [%]. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 223

224 .9 List of If 0 is entered as value, no droop is applied. r490 CO: Droop frequency / Droop freq. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays output signal of droop function. This result of droop calculation is subtracted from the speed controller setpoint. p492[0...2] BI: Enable droop / Enable droop G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Enables droop. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Dependency: Effective only if droop scaling P489 > Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

225 .9 List of p496[0...2] Scaling accel. precontrol / Scal acc. prectrl. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Enters scaling of acceleration in [%]. The response of setpoint changes for the speed control loop can be improved using the precontrol function (P496). Precontrol is derived from the differential frequency setpoint multiplied by the mass inertia P034; P0342 is then supplied as a torque setpoint to the current controller. If the filter (VC: P442, SLVC: P452) is applied in the correct manner, the derived speed controller is only required to control a small deviation in the value of the corrected variable. Setpoint changes are then passed by the speed controller and are quickly executed. r490 p492 p489 p ms Droop p034 p0342 r58 r538 r70 Freq. setpoint Act. frequency r0063 p496 =0 >0 PI Speed controller r538 r539 r539 r508 r538 r539 Torque setpoint r0079 P496 = 0: Precontrol disabled P496 > 0: Precontrol enabled p499[0...2] P496 = 00: Standard setting for precontrol Scaling accel. torque control / Scal acc. trq ctrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 00.0 Enters scaling of acceleration in [%] for sensorless torque control (SLVC) at low frequencies. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 225

226 .9 List of p500[0...2] Selection of torque setpoint / Torque setp. sel. G20 (CU240S) Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects torque setpoint source. In the table of possible settings below, the main setpoint is selected from the least significant digit (i.e., 0 to 7) and any additional setpoint from the most significant digit (i.e., x0 through to x7). Values: 0: No main setpoint 2: Analog setpoint 4: USS on RS232 5: USS on RS485 7: Analog setpoint 2 20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 25: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232 42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232 44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232 45: USS on RS485 + USS on RS232 47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232 50: No main setpoint + USS on RS485 52: Analog setpoint + USS on RS485 54: USS on RS232 + USS on RS485 55: USS on RS485 + USS on RS485 57: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS485 70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2 75: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2 77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2 Example: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Caution: Be aware, by changing of parameter P500 all BICO parameters (see table below) are modified. 226 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

227 .9 List of P500 = xy x = 0 x = 2 x = 4 x = 5 x = 7 P500 = xy y = 0 y = 2 y = 4 y = 5 y = P P P P P P P P P P5 Example: P500 = 24 P503 = 205. P5 = p500[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Selection of torque setpoint / Torque setp. sel. Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Selects torque setpoint source. In the table of possible settings below, the main setpoint is selected from the least significant digit (i.e., 0 to 7) and any additional setpoint from the most significant digit (i.e., x0 through to x7). Values: 0: No main setpoint 2: Analog setpoint 4: USS on RS232 6: Fieldbus 7: Analog setpoint 2 20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 26: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232 42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232 44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232 46: Fieldbus + USS on RS232 47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232 60: No main setpoint + Fieldbus 62: Analog setpoint + Fieldbus 64: USS on RS232 + Fieldbus 66: Fieldbus + Fieldbus 67: Analog setpoint 2 + Fieldbus 70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2 74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2 76: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 2 77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 227

228 .9 List of Example: Caution: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) Be aware, by changing of parameter P500 all BICO parameters (see table below) are modified. P500 = xy x = 0 x = 2 x = 4 x = 6 x = 7 P500 = xy y = 0 y = 2 y = 4 y = 6 y = P P P P P P P P P P5 Example: P500 = 26 P503 = P5 = Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

229 .9 List of p50[0...2] BI: Change to torque control / -> torque ctrl. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects command source from which it is possible to change between master (speed control) and slave (torque control). Droop Precontrol K p Tn 0 r58 r70 Freq. setpoint *) PI Speed controller r538 r538 r0063 Act. frequency Ti r539 r508 r539 Torque setpoint r0079 CI: M-Sollw p503.c (0:0) BI:n<>M-Reg p50.c (0:0) *) only active, if pre-control is enabled (p496 > 0) SLVC: VC: Ti Kp Tn p452 p442 p470 p460 p472 p462 Caution: [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) The OFF command is not recognized when torque control is selected indirectly (P300=20, 2 and P50=). However, if direct selection of torque control is used (P300=22, 23) the OFF command is recognized as OFF2. If indirect selection of torque control is used, it is recommended to program an OFF2 command using, for example a digital input or create the following circuit using the Free Function Blocks (FFB): p50 Source Torque switch-over Source ON/OFF & p0844 OFF2 p0840 ON/OFF Speed control with encoder feedback see P460 Speed control without encoder feedback see P470 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 229

230 .9 List of p503[0...2] CI: Torque setpoint / Torque setp. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r508 CO: Torque setpoint / Torque setp. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays torque setpoint before limitation. p5[0...2] CI: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r55 CO: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays additional torque setpoint. r58 CO: Acceleration torque / Accel. torque G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays acceleration torque. p520[0...2] CO: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 5.3 Specifies fixed value for upper torque limitation. p520 def p520 max =.5 r0333 = ± 4 r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

231 .9 List of p52[0...2] CO: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] -5.3 Enters fixed value of lower torque limitation. p52 def p52 max =.5 r0333 = ± 4 r0333 p522[0...2] CI: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 520:0 Selects source of upper torque limitation. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p523[0...2] CI: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 52:0 Selects source of lower torque limitation. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p525[0...2] Scaling lower torque limit / Scal. low trq. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 00.0 Enters scaling of lower torque limitation in [%]. P525 = 00 % = standard setting Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 23

232 .9 List of r526 CO: Upper torque limitation / Upper trq. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual upper torque limitation. Resultant torque limit M Power limitation Stall limitation Torque limitation r526 r527 ~ f ~ f 2 p530 p53 Constant torque Constant power f stall Stall power f act Dependency: The parameters r526 and r527 depend on P520, P52, P522, P523 and P525. r527 CO: Lower torque limitation / Lower trq. lim G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual lower torque limitation. See parameter r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

233 .9 List of p530[0...2] Motoring power limitation / Motoring power lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power (motoring power limitation). p530 def = 2.5 P0307 p530 max = 3 P0307 Parameter P530 limits the torque in addition to the act. frequency as displayed in the following characteristic. Power limitation (motoring, regenerative) M = P 2 π f p53 M p530 f p530 p53 p53[0...2] Regenerative power limitation / Regener. power lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active power (regenerative power limitation). p53 def = P0307 p53 min = - 3 P0307 See parameter P530. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 233

234 .9 List of r536 CO: Max. trq. motoring current / Max trq mot cur G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays maximum torque motoring current component. r537 CO: Max trq regenerative current / Max trq reg cur G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays maximum torque of the regenerative current component. r538 CO: Upper torque limit (total) / Total up TrqLim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays total upper torque limitation. r539 CO: Lower torque limit (total) / Total lw TrqLim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays total lower torque limitation. p570[0...2] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint / Fval flux setp G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 50.0 [] [] 00.0 Defines fixed value of flux setpoint in [%] relative to rated motor flux. If P570 > 00%, the flux setpoint rises according to the load from 00 % to the value of P570 between idling and nominal load. p574[0...2] Dynamic voltage headroom / Dyn. volt headroom G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 50 [] 0 Sets dynamic voltage headroom for vector control. 234 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

235 .9 List of p580[0...2] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency optimiz G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 00 [] 0 Enters degree of efficiency optimization in [%]. If P580 > 0, the dynamics for speed control (P470, P472) are restricted to prevent vibration. When no load is applied, a value of 00 % produces full flux reduction (i.e. to 50 % of rated motor flux). When using optimization, it is necessary to increase the smoothing time of the flux setpoint (P582). p582[0...2] Smooth time for flux setpoint / Flux setp. Tsmooth G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 4 [] 500 [] 5 Sets time constant of PT filter to smooth flux setpoint. r583 CO: Flux setpoint (smoothed) / Smoothed setp. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays smoothed flux setpoint in [%] relative to rated motor flux. p590[0...2] Gain of flux controller / Gain flux ctrl. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Enters gain of flux controller. p592[0...2] Integral time of flux controller / Int.time flux ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T.0 [] [] 30.0 Enters integral time of flux controller. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 235

236 .9 List of P592 = 0 switches off the integral part of the flux control. p596[0...2] Int. time field weak. controller / Int.time weak.ctrl G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 20 [] 3200 [] 50 Sets integral time for field weakening controller. r597 CO: Outp. field weak. controller / Outp.weak. ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays output signal of field weakening controller in [%] relative to rated motor flux. r598 CO: Flux setpoint (total) / Total flux setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays total flux setpoint in [%] relative to the rated motor flux. p60[0...2] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) / Cont. torque boost G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 50.0 Sets continuous torque boost in lower speed range of SLVC (sensorless vector control). Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333. i sd f p755 f(t) i sd (p60, p6) i sd (t) r033 p0346 p60 = p6 = 0 t P60 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor torque. 236 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

237 .9 List of p6[0...2] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) / Acc trq boost SLVC G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Sets acceleration torque boost in lower speed range of SLVC (sensorless vector control). Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333. P6 = 00 % corresponds to rated motor torque. p654[0...2] Smooth time for Isq setpoint / Isq setp. Tsmooth G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 2.0 [] 20.0 [] 6.0 Sets time constant of PT filter to filter setpoint of torque generating current component in field weakening range. p75[0...2] Gain current controller / Gain current ctrl. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T p77[0...2] Integral time current controller / Int.time cur. ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T.0 [] 50.0 [] 4. r78 CO: Output of Isq controller / Outp. Isq ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual output of Isq current (torque current) controller (PI controller). It contains the proportional and integral part of the PI controller. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 237

238 .9 List of r79 CO: Integral output of Isq ctrl. / Int. outp. Isq G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays integral output of Isq current (torque current) controller (PI controller). r723 CO: Output of Isd controller / Outp. Isd ctrl G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual output of Isd current (flux current) controller (PI controller). It contains the proportional and integral part of the PI controller. r724 CO: Integral output of Isd ctrl. / Int. outp. Isd G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays integral output of Isd current (flux current) controller (PI controller). r725 CO: Integral limit of Isd ctrl. / Int. limit Isd G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays limit of integral output voltage setpoint of Isd current controller. r728 CO: Decoupling voltage / Decoupl. volt G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays actual output voltage setpoint of cross channel decoupling. p740 Gain for oscillation damping / Oscill. damp. gain G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets oscillation damping gain for sensorless vector control at low frequencies. p745[0...2] Flux variance limit in stall / Flux var.lim.stall G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 5.0 Sets the flux variance limit. With SLVC the variance between the flux setpoint and the actual flux is used to detect motor stall conditions. The function is active, with SLVC (P300 = 20 or 22) and control in open loop mode (output frequency > P755). 238 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

239 .9 List of r746 CO: Actual flux variance / Act. flux variance G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays the present percentage of flux variance. See P745. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 239

240 .9 List of p750[0...2] Control word of motor model / Motor model CtrlWd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T bin Control word of motor model. This parameter controls the operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) at very low frequencies. This therefore includes the following conditions: Operation directly after an ON command zero crossing. f Start f Zero crossing Closed loop Closed loop p755 p755 Open loop Open loop t t p755 SLVC open loop means that the speed controller does not get any speed feedback from the observer model. 240 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

241 .9 List of r0062 Precontrol Torque limitation Frequency setpoint Speed controller p452 p470 p472 Flux setpoint closed loop p750/p755 open/closed loop.. i sq i sd Current controller Act. output voltage p60 p6 Flux setpoint open loop Current measurement i u i w i v Act. angle + Act. frequency Act. output frequency Slip + Observer model closed loop 0 Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Start SLVC open loop Yes No - 0 Zero crossing SLVC open loop Yes No - r75 CO/BO: Status word of motor model / Motor model StatWd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Displays status of transition from feed-forward to observer-control and vice versa. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Transit to SLVC open loop Yes No - 0 N-adaption enabled Yes No - 02 Transit to SLVC closed loop No Yes - 03 Speed controller enabled Yes No - 04 Current injection Yes No - 05 Start flux decrease Yes No - 4 Rs adapted Yes No - 5 Xh adapted Yes No - Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 24

242 .9 List of p755[0...2] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Start-freq. (SLVC) G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0. [] [] 5.0 Enters start frequency of sensorless vector control (SLVC). f_act P755 P756 [Hz] t SLVC open loop SLVC closed loop P756[%] P756[Hz] = P755[Hz] 00[%] P758 t p756[0...2] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Hyst. freq. (SLVC) G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 00.0 [] 50.0 Enters hysteresis frequency (in percent of start-frequency) to switch back from sensorless-vector-control (SLVC) to current model. Value is entered in the range 0 % to 50 % relative to P755 (SLVC stop frequency). p758[0...2] T(wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode / T(wait) trans.->ff G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 00 [] 2000 [] 500 Sets waiting time for change from observer-mode to feed-forward-mode 242 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

243 .9 List of p759[0...2] T(wait) for n-adaption to settle / T(w):n-ad.->settle G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 50 [] 2000 [] 00 Sets waiting time while transition is done from open-loop to close-loop operation p764[0...2] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) / Kp n-adapt. (SLVC) G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Enters gain of speed adaptation controller for sensorless vector control. p767[0...2] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) / Tn n-adapt. (SLVC) G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T.0 [] [] 4.0 Enters speed adaptation controller integral time. r770 CO: Prop. output of n-adaption / Prop outp n-ad G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays proportional part of speed adaptation controller. r77 CO: Int. output of n-adaption / Int. outp n-ad G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays integral part of speed adaptation controller. r778 CO: Flux angle difference / Flux angle diff G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays flux angle difference between motor model and current transformation before motor model is active. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 243

244 .9 List of p780[0...2] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption / CtrlWd Rs/Rr adapt G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T bin Enables thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistance to reduce torque errors in speed/torque regulation with speed sensor, or speed errors in speed/torque regulation without speed sensor. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt. Yes No - 0 Enable observer Rs-adapt. Yes No - 02 Enable observer Xm-adapt. Yes No - Only stator resistance adaptation is carried out for synchronous motors. p78[0...2] Tn of Rs-adaption / Tn of Rs-adaption G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 2000 [] 00 Enters Rs-adaptation controller integral time. r782 CO: Output of Rs-adaptation / Output Rs-adaption G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays stator resistance adaptation from controller in [%] relative to rated motor resistance. The rated motor resistance is given by the formula: Rated motor impedance: VN ZN = = p IN 3 p0305 <=>00% p786[0...2] Tn of Xm-adaption / Tn of Xm-adaption G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 2000 [] 00 Enters Xm-adaptation controller integral time. 244 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

245 .9 List of r787 CO: Output of Xm-adaption / Outp. Xm-adaption G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays main reactance adaptation from controller in [%] relative to rated impedance. The rated motor resistance is given by the formula: Rated motor impedance: ZN = VN 3 IN = p p0305 <=>00% p800 Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T 2 [] 6 [] 4 Dependency: Sets pulse frequency of power switches in inverter. The frequency can be changed in steps of 2 khz. Minimum pulse frequency depends on P082 (maximum frequency) and P030 (rated motor frequency). The maximal frequency P082 is limited to pulse frequency P800 (see P082). If the pulse frequency is increased, max. inverter current r0209 can be reduced (derating). The derating characteristic depends on the type and power of the inverter (see manuall OPERATING INSTRUC- TION). If silent operation is not absolutely necessary, lower pulse frequencies may be selected to reduce inverter losses and radio-frequency emissions. Under certain circumstances, the inverter may reduce the switching frequency to provide protection against overtemperature (see P0290 and P029 Bit00). r80 CO: Act. pulse frequency / Act pulse freq G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned8 Notice: Actual pulse frequency of power switches in inverter. Under certain conditions (inverter overtemperature, see P0290), this can differ from the values selected in P800 (pulse frequency). p802 Modulator mode / Modulator mode G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 3 3 Selects inverter modulator mode. Values: : Asymmetric SVM 2: Space vector modulation 3: SVM/ASVM controlled mode Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 245

246 .9 List of Notice: Asymmetric space vector modulation (ASVM) produces lower switching losses than space vector modulation (SVM), but may cause irregular rotation at very low speeds. Space vector modulation (SVM) with over-modulation may produce current waveform distortion at high output voltages. Space vector modulation (SVM) without over-modulation will reduce maximum output voltage available to motor. p803[0...2] Max. modulation / Max. modulation G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 20.0 [] 50.0 [] 06.0 Sets maximum modulation index. P803 = 00 % : Limit for over-control (for ideal inverter without switching delay). For vector control the modulation limit will be reduced automatically with 4 %. p820[0...2] Reverse output phase sequence / Rev.outp.phase seq G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Changes direction of motor rotation without changing setpoint polarity. Values: 0: Forward : Reverse the Motor Dependency: If positive and negative revolution is enabled, frequency setpoint is directly used. If both positive and negative revolution are disabled, reference value is set to zero. See P000 (select frequency setpoint) p825 On-state voltage of IGBT / On-state voltage G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 20.0 [] 0.9 Corrects on-state voltage of the IGBTs. p828 Gating unit dead time / Gating dead time G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] 3.98 [] 0.0 Sets compensation time of gating unit interlock. 246 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

247 .9 List of p900 Select motor data identification / Sel.mot.data ident G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T Performs a motor data identification. Values: 0: Disabled 2: Identification of all parameters in standstill 3: Ident. of all param. in standstill incl. the saturation curve Recommendation: P900 = 2: All motor data and inverter characteristic will be identified and parameter will be changed. P900 = 3: Same identifications like setting 2 but also the saturation curve will be identified and parameter will be changed. Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor. However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5 C of the measured ambient temperature stored in P0625. If the motor identification is not within the 5 C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (VC, SLVC) cannot be guaranteed. The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (Star or delta connection) must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data. The motor identification calculates this data based on a Phase of a Star equivalent circuit P P0360, irrespective of whether the motor is connected star or delta. This must be considered when the motor data is input directly. Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance. Once enabled (P900 <> 0), A054 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of motor parameters. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make internal calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. p909[0...2] Ctrl. word of motor data ident. / Ctrl.mot.data id. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T bin Control word of motor data identification. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 247

248 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Estimation of Xs Yes No - 02 Estimation of Tr Yes No - 03 Estimation of Lsigma Yes No - 05 Det. Tr meas. with 2 freq. Yes No - 08 MotID with hw deadtime comp activ Yes No - 4 MotID saturation curve optimization activ Yes No - 5 MotID disable preseting of saturation curve optim. Yes No - p90 Select motor data identification extended / Sel.mot.data ident G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Performs a motor data identification with extended figures. Values: 0: Disabled : Identification of all parameters with parameter change 2: Identification of all parameters without parameter change 3: Identification of saturation curve with parameter change 4: Identification of saturation curve without parameter change 5: Identification of XsigDyn (r920) without parameter change 6: Identification of Tdead (r926) without parameter change 7: Identification of Rs (r92 ) without parameter change 8: Identification of Xs (r95) without parameter change 9: Identification of Tr (r93) without parameter change 0: Identification of Xsigma (r94) without parameter change 20: Set voltage vector 2: Set voltage vector without filtering in P69 22: Set voltage vector rectangle signal 23: Set voltage vector triangle signal Recommendation: P90 = : All motor data and inverter characteristic will be identified and parameter will be changed. P90 = 2 : Values already calculated are not overwritten. P90 = 3: Saturation curve will be identified and parameter will be changed. Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor. However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5 C of the measured ambient temperature stored in P0625. If the motor identification is not within the 5 C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (VC, SLVC) cannot be guaranteed. Notice: The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (Star or delta connection) must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data. The motor identification calculates this data based on a Phase of a Star equivalent circuit P P0360, irrespective of whether the motor is connected star or delta. This must be considered when the motor data is input directly. When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following: 23. "with parameter change"means that the values are actually adopted as Pxxxx parameter settings (see common settings above) and applied to the controller as well as being shown in the read-only parameters below. 24. "without parameter change"means that the values are only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameters r92 (identified stator resistance), r93 (identified rotor time constant), r94 (ident. total leakage reactance), r95/r96/r97/r98/r99 (identified nominal stator reactance/identified stator reactance to 4), r925 (IGBT on-state voltage) and r926 (identified gating unit dead time). The values are not applied to the controller. 248 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

249 .9 List of Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance. Once enabled (P90 <> 0), A054 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of motor parameters. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make internal calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. p9 No. of phase to be identified / No.of phase for id G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 3 Selects maximum number of motor phases to be identified. r92[0...2] Identified stator resistance / Identif. stat. res G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Notice: Displays measured stator resistance value (line-to-line) in [Ohms] [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase If the value identified (Rs = stator resistance) does not lie within the range 0. % < Rs [p. u.] < 00 % fault message 4 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 2 in this case). This value is measured using P90 = or 2, i.e., identification of all parameters with/without change. r93[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / Identif.rot.Tconst G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Notice: Displays identified rotor time constant. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase If the value identified (Tr = rotor time constant) does not lie within the range 0ms < Tr < 5s fault message 4 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 6 in this case). r94[0...2] Ident. total leakage inductance / Tot.leak.induct. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified total leakage inductance. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 249

250 .9 List of Notice: [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase If the value identified (Lsigma = leakage inductance) does not lie within the range 5 % < Xsigma [p. u.] < 50 % fault message 4 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 7 in this case). r95[0...2] Ident. nom. stator inductance / Nom.stat.induct. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Notice: Displays identified stator inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase If the value identified (Ls = stator inductance) does not lie within the range 50 % < Xs [p. u.] < 500 % fault message 4 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 4 in this case). r96[0...2] Identified stator inductance / Stator induct. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified stator inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase See P95 (identified nominal stator inductance). r97[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / Stator induct. 2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified stator inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase See P95 (identified nominal stator inductance) r98[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / Stator induct. 3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified stator inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase See P95 (identified nominal stator reactance) r99[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / Stator induct. 4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified stator inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase See P95 (identified nominal stator inductance) 250 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

251 .9 List of r920[0...2] Identified dyn. leak. inductance / Dyn. leak. induct. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point Displays identified total dynamic leakage inductance. [0] = U_phase [] = V_phase [2] = W_phase r925[0...2] Identified on-state voltage / Id. on-state V. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Notice: Displays identified on-state voltage of IGBT. If the identified on-state voltage does not lie within the range 0.0V < 0V fault message 4 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 20 in this case). r926 Ident. gating unit dead time / Id.gating deadtime G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Displays identified dead time of gating unit interlock. p930 Voltage setpoint for calibration / Volt setp. calibr. G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 000 [] 0 Specifies reference voltage for generation of a test voltage vector (e.g. used for shunt calibration). p93 Phase / Phase G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 2 Defines phase of voltage vector Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 25

252 .9 List of p960 Speed control optimisation / Speed control opt. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2(), T 0 0 The drive should be set into a vector mode (P300 = 20 or 2) to carry out speed controller optimisation. When speed controller optimisation is enabled (P960 = ) the warning A0542 will become active. When the drive is next started it will do the optimisation tests. The drive will accelerate the motor to 20 % of P030 (rated motor frequency) using the ramp up time P20 and then under torque control go to 50 % of P030 (rated motor frequency). The drive will then ramp back down to 20 % using the ramp down time P2. This procedure is repeated several times and then average time taken. From this an estimation of the inertia of the load on the motor can be derived. From this the inertia ratio parameter (P0342) and the Kp gains for VC (P460) and SLVC (P470) are modified to give a response suitable for the measured inertia. Values: 0: Disable : Enable Notice: If there is a problem due to instability the drive may trip with an F0042 fault if a stable value has not been obtained on the ramp up within a reasonable time. It should be noted that the Dc link controller should be enabled whilst doing the test as otherwise overvoltage trips maybe experienced. This will however depend on the ramp down time and the system inertia. The speed loop optimisation may not be suitable for some applications due to the nature of the test i.e. accelerating under torque control from 20 % to 50 %. When the test is complete P960 will be cleared to zero. p2000[0...2] Reference frequency / Reference freq. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T Example: Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency for frequency values which are displayed/transferred as a percentage or a hexadecimal value. Where: hexadecimal 4000 H ==> P2000 (e.g.: USS-PZD) percentage 00 % ==> P2000 (e.g.: AI) If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P079 or P000, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Hz) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value. 252 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

253 .9 List of Caution: Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency of the above mentioned interfaces. A maximum frequency setpoint of 2*P2000 can be applied via the corresponding interface. Unlike parameter P082 (Max. Frequency) this limits the inverter frequency internally independent of the reference frequency. By modification of P2000 it will also adapt the parameter to the new settings. PZD f (Hex) P082 Analog f (%) f [Hz] Normalization Setpoint channel f_act Limitation f_act,limit Motor control f(hex) f(%) f[hz] = p2000 = P2000 f_act,limit = min(p082, f_act) 4000(Hex) 00% Notice: Reference parameters are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and actual value signals in a uniform manner. This also applies to fixed settings entered as a precentage. A value of 00 % correspondes to a process data value of 4000H, or H in the case of double values. In this respect, the following parameters are available: p2000 p200 p2002 Reference frequency Reference voltage Reference current Hz V A p2003 p2004 Reference torque Reference power Nm kw hp f(p000) Changes to P2000 result in a new calculation of P2004. p200[0...2] Reference voltage / Reference voltage G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Example: 0 [] 2000 [] 000 Full-scale output voltage (i.e. 00 % ) used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H). Changes to P200 result in a new calculation of P2004. p2002[0...2] Reference current / Reference current G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T Example: 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Full-scale output current used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H). If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. A) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 253

254 .9 List of Changes to P2002 result in a new calculation of P2004. p2003[0...2] Reference torque / Reference torque G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T 0.0 [] [] 0.75 Full-scale reference torque used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H). Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P500, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Nm) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value. Changes to P2003 result in a new calculation of P2004. p2004[0...2] Reference power / Reference power G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H). r2004 = 2 π f M = π p2000 P Example: p2004[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. kw / hp) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value. Reference power / Reference power Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: T Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H). r2004 = 2 π f M = π p2000 P Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. kw / hp) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value. 254 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

255 .9 List of p200[0...] USS baudrate / USS baudrate G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Sets baud rate for USS communication. Values: 4: 2400 baud 5: 4800 baud 6: 9600 baud 7: 9200 baud 8: baud 9: baud 0: baud : baud 2: 5200 baud [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 p20[0...] USS address / USS address G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T Sets unique address for inverter. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 You can connect up to a further 30 inverters via the serial link (i.e. 3 inverters in total) and control them with the USS serial bus protocol. p202[0...] USS PZD length / USS PZD length G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T Defines the number of 6-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram. In this area, process data (PZD) are continually exchanged between the master and slaves. The PZD part of the USS telegram is used for the main setpoint, and to control the inverter. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 255

256 .9 List of Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P202 and P203 respectively. USS telegram STX LGE ADR Parameter Process data PKW PZD BCC PKE IND PWE PZD PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 STX LGE ADR PKW PZD BCC Start of text Length Address Parameter ID value Process data Block check character PKE IND PWE Parameter ID Sub-index Parameter value PZD transmits a control word and setpoint or status word and actual values. The number of PZD-words in a USS-telegram are determined by parameter P202, where the first two words are either: a) control word and main setpoint or b) status word and actual value. When P202 is greater or equal to 4 the additional control word is transferred as the 4th PZD-word (default setting). STW ZSW HSW HIW STW2 PZD PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 p202 STW ZSW PZD Control word Status word Process data HSW HIW Main setpoint Main actual value p203[0...] USS PKW length / USS PKW length G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Defines the number of 6-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram. The PKW area can be varied. Depending on the particular requirement, 3-word, 4-word or variable word lengths can be parameterized. The PKW part of the USS telegram is used to read and write individual parameter values. Values: 0: No words 3: 3 words 4: 4 words 27: Variable Example: [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

257 .9 List of Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P202 and P203 respectively. Parameter P203 determines the number of PKW-words in a USS-telegram. Setting P203 to 3 or 4 determines the length of the PKW words (3 = three words and 4 = four words). When P203 set to 27 automatically adjusts the length of the PKW words are required. p203 = 3 p203 PKE IND PWE word each 6 Bit p203 = 4 p203 PKE IND PWE PKE IND PWE Parameter ID Sub-index Parameter value If a fixed PKW length is selected only one parameter value can be transferred. In the case of indexed parameter, you must use the variable PKW length if you wish to have the values of all indices transferred in a single telegram. In selecting the fixed PKW length, it is important to ensure the value in question can be transferred using this PKW length. P203 = 3, fixes PKW length, but does not allow access to many parameter values. A parameter fault is generated when an out-of-range value is used, the value will not be accepted but the inverter state will not be affected. Useful for applications where parameters are not changed, but MM3s are also used. Broadcast mode is not possible with this setting. P203 = 4, fixes PKW length. Allows access to all parameters, but indexed parameters can only be read one index at a time. Word order for single word values are different to setting 3 or 27, see example below. P203 = 27, most useful setting. PKW reply length varies depending on the amount of information needed. Can read fault information and all indices of a parameter with a single telegram with this setting. Example: Set P0700 to value 5 (0700 = 2BC (hex)) p203 = 3 p203 = 4 p203 = 27 Master SINAMICS 22BC BC BC SINAMICS Master 2BC BC BC Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 257

258 .9 List of p204[0...] USS telegram off time / USS telegram T_off G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Notice: 0 [] [] 0 Defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated (F0070) if no telegram is received via the USS channels. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 By default (time set to 0), no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled). r205[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS232 / PZD<-USS G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays process data received via USS on RS232. PZD4 STW2 PZD3 PZD2 HSW p202 PZD STW r205 [0] r2032 [] [2] [3]. r2033 [7] BCC PZD Process data PKW Parameter USS telegram ADR LGE STX STX LGE ADR PKW PZD BCC STW HSW Start of text Length Address Parameter ID value Process data Block check character Control word Main setpoint USS on RS232 PZD mapping to parameter r205 [0] = Received word 0 [] = Received word [2] = Received word 2 [3] = Received word 3 [4] = Received word 4 [5] = Received word 5 [6] = Received word 6 [7] = Received word 7 The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2032 and r2033. Restrictions: If the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P079) then the st control word must be transferred in the st PZD-word. If the setpoint source is selected via P000 or P079, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the 2nd PZD-word, When P202 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th PZD-word, if the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P079). 258 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

259 .9 List of p206[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS232 / PZD->USS G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 52:0 Selects signals to be transmitted to serial interface via USS on RS232. STX LGE ADR PKW PZD BCC ZSW HIW r0052 r0052 r002 r0053 r0053 Start of text Length Address Parameter ID value Process data Block check character Status word Main actual value P206 [0] [] [2] [3]. PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD [7] ZSW2 HIW ZSW P202 BCC PZD Process data PKW Parameter USS telegram ADR LGE STX PZD mapping from parameter P206 USS on RS232 Example: This parameter allows the user to define the source of the status words and actual values for the reply PZD. P206[0] = 52.0 (default). In this case, the value of r0052 (CO/BO: Status word) is transmitted as st PZD to the USS on RS232. [0] = Transmitted word 0 [] = Transmitted word [2] = Transmitted word 2 [3] = Transmitted word 3 [4] = Transmitted word 4 [5] = Transmitted word 5 [6] = Transmitted word 6 [7] = Transmitted word 7 If r0052 not indexed, display does not show an index (".0" ). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 259

260 .9 List of r208[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS485 / PZD<-COM(USS) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays process data received via USS on RS485. PZD4 STW2 PZD3 PZD2 HSW p202 PZD STW r208 [0] r2036 [] [2] [3]. r2037 [7] BCC PZD Process data PKW Parameter USS telegram ADR LGE STX STX LGE ADR PKW PZD BCC STW HSW Start of text Length Address Parameter ID value Process data Block check character Control word Main setpoint USS on COM link PZD mapping to parameter r208 [0] = Received word 0 [] = Received word [2] = Received word 2 [3] = Received word 3 [4] = Received word 4 [5] = Received word 5 [6] = Received word 6 [7] = Received word 7 Restrictions: If the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P079) then the st control word must be transferred in the st PZD-word. If the setpoint source is selected via P000 or P079, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the 2nd PZD-word, When P202 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th PZD-word, if the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P079). 260 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

261 .9 List of p209[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS485 (USS) / PZD->COM (USS) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 52:0 Displays process data received via USS on RS485. STX LGE ADR PKW PZD BCC ZSW HIW r0052 r0052 r002 r0053 r0053 Start of text Length Address Parameter ID value Process data Block check character Status word Main actual value p209 [0] [] [2] [3]. PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD [7] ZSW2 HIW ZSW p202 BCC PZD Process data PKW Parameter USS telegram ADR LGE STX PZD mapping from parameterp209 USS on COM link [0] = Transmitted word 0 [] = Transmitted word [2] = Transmitted word 2 [3] = Transmitted word 3 [4] = Transmitted word 4 [5] = Transmitted word 5 [6] = Transmitted word 6 [7] = Transmitted word 7 See P206 (PZD to USS on RS232) r2024[0...] USS error-free telegrams / USS error-free tel G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of error-free USS telegrams received. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2025[0...] USS rejected telegrams / USS rejected tel. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams rejected. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2026[0...] USS character frame error / USS char.frame err G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS character frame errors. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 26

262 .9 List of [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2027[0...] USS overrun error / USS overrun error G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams with overrun error. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2028[0...] USS parity error / USS parity error G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams with parity error. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2029[0...] USS start not identified / USS start unident. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams with unidentified start. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2030[0...] USS BCC error / USS BCC error G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams with BCC error. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r203[0...] USS length error / USS length error G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 Displays number of USS telegrams with incorrect length. [0] = USS on RS485 [] = USS on RS232 r2032 BO: CtrlWrd from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd <- USS G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word from USS on RS232 (word within USS). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes - 03 Pulse enable Yes No - 04 RFG enable Yes No Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

263 .9 List of 05 RFG start Yes No - 06 Setpoint enable Yes No - 07 Fault acknowledge Yes No - 08 JOG right Yes No - 09 JOG left Yes No - 0 Control from PLC Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - 5 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No - r2033 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd2 <- USS G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word 2 from USS on RS232 (i.e. word 4 within USS). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No - 0 Fixed frequency Bit Yes No - 02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No - 03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No - 04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No - 05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit Yes No - 08 Enable PID Yes No - 09 Enable DC brake Yes No - Enable Droop Yes No - 2 Torque control Yes No - 3 External fault No Yes - 5 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit Yes No - Dependency: P0700 = 4 (USS on RS232) and P079 = 0 (Cmd / Setpoint = BICO parameter). r2036 BO: CtrlWrd from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd <- COM G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word from USS on RS485 (i.e. word within USS = PZD). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes - 03 Pulse enable Yes No - 04 RFG enable Yes No - 05 RFG start Yes No - 06 Setpoint enable Yes No - 07 Fault acknowledge Yes No - 08 JOG right Yes No - 09 JOG left Yes No - 0 Control from PLC Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - 5 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No - Dependency: See parameter P202 See r2033 (control word 2 from USS on RS232). The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 263

264 .9 List of r2037 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd2 <- COM G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word 2 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 4 within USS = PZD4). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No - 0 Fixed frequency Bit Yes No - 02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No - 03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No - 04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No - 05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit Yes No - 08 Enable PID Yes No - 09 Enable DC brake Yes No - Enable Droop Yes No - 2 Torque control Yes No - 3 External fault No Yes - 5 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit Yes No - Dependency: See parameter P202 See r2033 (control word 2 from USS on RS232). To enable the external fault (r2037 Bit 3) facility via USS, the following parameters must be set: P202 = 4 P206 = The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the Parameter List. p2038 Selection of actual profile / Actual profile G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Selects the profile which can be : PROFIDrive Profile, or VIK/Namur Values: 0: Profidrive Profile 2: Namur 3: reserved Dependency: Setting parameter p2038 to NAMUR by selecting Telegram 20 in P0922. Setting parameter p922 from Telegram 20 to other setting will reset p2038 to PROFIDrive Profile. Changing P2038 also resets all the Bico connections corresponding to settings in P0700 and P0922. Example: P0700=4, P2038 = 0, P0922 = 999, P0840 = Set P0840 = Now change P2038 : the parameter P0840 will be reset to ( P0700 = 4 ) By changing P0922 or P2038, following parameters can be modified : P0840, P0844, P0848, P0852, P40, P4, P42, P204, P055, P056, P3, P035, P036, P080, P0820.for the control word P020, P02, P022, P023, P0820, P082, P2200, P230, P50, P206.for the control word 2 See also : Switching to / from Namur in the description of parameter P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

265 .9 List of p2040 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CB telegram off time / CB tel. off time Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 [] [] 500 Dependency: p204[0...4] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines time after which a fault will be generated (F0070) if no telegram is received via the link. Setting 0 = watchdog disabled CB parameter / CB parameter Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Configures a communication board (CB). [0] = CB parameter 0 [] = CB parameter [2] = CB parameter 2 [3] = CB parameter 3 [4] = CB parameter 4 See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings. p2042 Selection of ident number / Ident nb G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Selects if native ident number (0) or NAMUR ident number () is send to the PLC. Values: 0: Native : Namur After changing P2042, a power cycle must be done to have changes take effect. See also : Switching to / from Namur in the description of parameter P0922. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 265

266 .9 List of r2050[0...7] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO: PZD from CB / PZD from CB Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays PZD received from communication board (CB). PZD4 STW2 PZD3 PZD2 HSW PZD STW r2050 [0] [] [2] [3] r2090 r209 Fieldbus FB00 input FREQ_SET FB00 input CTRL PZD4 (STW2) PZD (STW) Bit 3 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4... Bit Bit 0 PZD mapping to parameter r2050 PZD STW HSW Process data Control word Main setpoint [0] = Received word 0 [] = Received word [2] = Received word 2 [3] = Received word 3 [4] = Received word 4 [5] = Received word 5 [6] = Received word 6 [7] = Received word 7 The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2090 and r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

267 .9 List of p205[0...7] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CI: PZD to CB / PZD to CB Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 52:0 Connects PZD to CB. This parameter allows the user to define the source of status words and actual values for the reply PZD. r0052 r0052 r002 r0053 r0053 P205 [0] [] [2] [3] PZD4 ZSW2 PZD3 PZD2 HIW PZD ZSW PZD mapping from parameter P205 Fieldbus FB00 output FREQ PZD ZSW HIW Process data Status word Main actual value FB00 output STAT PZD4 (ZSW2) PZD (ZSW) Bit 3 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4... Bit Bit 0 Recommendation: Status word = 52 CO/BO: Act. status word (see r0052) Actual value = 2 inverter output frequency (see r002) Other BICO settings are possible [0] = Transmitted word 0 [] = Transmitted word [2] = Transmitted word 2 [3] = Transmitted word 3 [4] = Transmitted word 4 [5] = Transmitted word 5 [6] = Transmitted word 6 [7] = Transmitted word 7 Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0922) and Control from ProfiBus, parameter can not be changed except Standard Telegram 20, index 5. r2053[0...4] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CB identification / CB identification Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays identification data of the communication board (CB). The different CB types (r2053[0]) are given in the Enum declaration. Values: 0: No CB option board : PROFIBUS DP 2: DeviceNet 256: not defined Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 267

268 .9 List of [0] = CB type (PROFIBUS = ) [] = Firmware version [2] = Firmware version detail [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) r2054[0...6] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CB diagnosis / CB diagnosis Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays diagnostic information of communication board (CB). [0] = CB diagnosis 0 [] = CB diagnosis [2] = CB diagnosis 2 [3] = CB diagnosis 3 [4] = CB diagnosis 4 [5] = CB diagnosis 5 [6] = CB diagnosis 6 See relevant communications board manual. r2059[0...4] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) r2090 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO: Displays SOL link stats for Sol Master. / Disp SOL stats Access level: 4 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays SOL link stats for Sol Master. [0] = messages txd [] = valid messages rxd [2] = crc errors [3] = stx errors [4] = reconfigurations BO: Control word from CB / CtrlWd <- CB Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word received from communication board (CB). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 ON/OFF Yes No - 0 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes - 02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes - 03 Pulse enable Yes No - 04 RFG enable Yes No - 05 RFG start Yes No - 06 Setpoint enable Yes No - 07 Fault acknowledge Yes No - 08 JOG right Yes No - 09 JOG left Yes No - 0 Control from PLC Yes No - Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No - 3 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No - 4 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No - 5 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No - See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings. If P0700 = 6 (Profibus) then P80 must be set to for correct operation. This will not be cleared automatically when P0700 is no longer equal to Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

269 .9 List of r209 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) BO: Control word 2 from CB / CtrlWd2 <- CB Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Displays control word 2 received from communication board (CB). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No - 0 Fixed frequency Bit Yes No - 02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No - 03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No - 04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No - 05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit Yes No - 08 Enable PID Yes No - 09 Enable DC brake Yes No - Enable Droop Yes No - 2 Torque control Yes No - 3 External fault No Yes - 5 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit Yes No - See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings. p200[0...2] Alarm number selection / Alarm No selection G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Example: Selects up to 3 faults or warnings for non-default reactions. If you want F0005 to perform an OFF3 instead of an OFF2, set P200[0] = 5, then select the desired reaction in P20[0] (in this case, set P20[0] = 3). [0] = Fault Number [] = Fault Number 2 [2] = Fault Number 3 All fault codes have a default reaction to OFF2. Some fault codes caused by hardware trips (e.g. overcurrent) cannot be changed from the default reactions. p20[0...2] Stop reaction value / Stop reaction val. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Sets drive stop reaction values for fault selected by P200 (alarm number stop reaction). This indexed parameter specifies the special reaction to the faults/warnings defined in P200 indices 0 to 2. Values: 0: No reaction, no display : OFF stop reaction 2: OFF2 stop reaction 3: OFF3 stop reaction 4: No reaction warning only [0] = Stop reaction value [] = Stop reaction value 2 [2] = Stop reaction value 3 Settings 0-3 only are available for fault codes. Settings 0 and 4 only are available for warnings. Index 0 (P20) refers to fault/warning in index 0 (P200). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 269

270 .9 List of p203[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) BI:. Faults acknowledgement /. Faults ackn Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:2 p203[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines first source of fault acknowledgement, e.g. keypad/di, etc. (depending on setting) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI:. Faults acknowledgement /. Faults ackn Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:2 Recommendation: Recommendation: p204[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines first source of fault acknowledgement, e.g. keypad/di, etc. (depending on setting) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:7 Selects second source of fault acknowledgement. 270 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

271 .9 List of Dependency: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p204[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:7 Dependency: Selects second source of fault acknowledgement = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. p204[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn G20 (CU240S) Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Recommendation: Selects second source of fault acknowledgement = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 27

272 .9 List of Dependency: p206[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p922 is Standard Telegram), parameter can not be changed. BI: External fault / External fault Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 p206[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP- F) = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) BI: External fault / External fault Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico :0 Recommendation: Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r20[0...3] CO: Warning number / Warning number G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Displays warning information. A maximum of 2 active warnings (indices 0 and ) and 2 historical warnings (indices 2 and 3) may be viewed. 272 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

273 .9 List of [0] = Recent Warnings --, warning [] = Recent Warnings --, warning 2 [2] = Recent Warnings -, warning 3 [3] = Recent Warnings -, warning 4 Notice: Indices 0 and are not stored. The keypad will flash while a warning is active. The LED indicates the warning status in this case. p2 Total number of warnings / Total no. warnings G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T Displays number of warning (up to 4) since last reset. Set to 0 to reset the warning history. r24[0...] Run time counter / Run time counter G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Displays run time counter. It is the total time the drive has been powered up. When power goes value is saved, then restored on powerup. The run time counter r24 will be calculate as followed: Multiply the value in r24[0], by and then add it to the value in r24[]. The resultant answer will be in seconds. This means that r24[0] is not days. Total powerup time = * r24[0] + r24[] seconds. When the real time is not given in P25, the time in this parameter is used by r0948 to indicate when a fault has occured. Example: If r24[0] = & r24[] = We get * = seconds which equals day. [0] = System Time, Seconds, Upper Word [] = System Time, Seconds, Lower Word See r0948 (fault time) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 273

274 .9 List of p25[0...2] Real time clock / Real time clk G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Displays real time. All inverters require an on-board clock function with which fault conditions may be timestamped and logged. However, they have no battery backed Real Time Clock (RTC). Inverters may support a software driven RTC which requires synchronisation with the RTC supplied via a serial interface. The time is stored in a word array parameter P25. The time will be set by USS Protocol standard "word array parameter write" telegrams. Once the last word is received in index 2, the software will start running the timer itself using internal running millisecond tic. Hence becoming like RTC. If powercycle takes place, then the real time must be sent again to the inverter. Time is maintained in a word array parameter and encoded as follows - the same format will be used in fault report logs. Index 0 2 High Byte (MSB) Seconds (0-59) Hours (0-23) Month ( - 2) Low Byte (LSB) Minutes (0-59) Days ( - 3) Years (00-250) Time is measured from Jan st Values are in binary form. [0] = Real Time, Seconds+Minutes [] = Real Time, Hours+Days [2] = Real Time, Month+Year See r0948 (fault time). p220 Indication counter / Indication counter G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Indicates total number of alarm events. This parameter is incremented whenever an alarm event occurs. It also gets incremented when a warning is cleared or faults are cleared. This parameter is used by the PC tools. r23 CO: Last fault number code / Last fault code G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Last fault number code r232 CO: First fault number code / First fault code G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 First fault number code 274 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

275 .9 List of p250[0...2] Hysteresis frequency f_hys / Hyst. freq. f_hys G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines hysteresis level applied for comparing frequency and speed to threshold as illustrated in the diagram below. f_act > 0 0 f_act f_act > 0 0 { r297 Bit03 r0052 Bit4 f_set Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) {- 0 f_act >= f_set 0 r297 Bit04 r0053 Bit06 f_act >= f_set - Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) p253[0...2] Time-constant speed filter / Tconst. speed filt G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 000 [] 5 Specifies time constant of first-order speed filter. The filtered speed is then compared to the thresholds. See diagram in P255, P257 and P259 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 275

276 { {.9 List of p255[0...2] Threshold frequency f_ / Threshold freq f_ G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets a threshold for comparing actual speed or frequency to threshold values f_. This threshold controls status bits 4 and 5 in status word 2 (r0053). f_act <= f_ f_act > f_ r269 Threshold freq f_ [Hz] p255.d (30.00) Delay time of f _ [ms] p256.d (0) f_act Tconst. speed filt [ms] p253.d (5) Threshold freq f_ [Hz] p255.d (30.00) 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] p250.d (3.00) 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] p250.d (3.00) T 0 T 0 Delay time of f _ [ms] p256.d (0) f_act <= f_ r297 Bit0 r0053 Bit05 f_act > f_ r297 Bit02 r0053 Bit04 p256[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_ / Delay time of f_ G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Sets delay time prior to threshold frequency f_ comparison (P255). See diagram in P255 (threshold frequency f_) 276 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

277 { {.9 List of p257[0...2] Threshold frequency f_2 / Threshold freq f_2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds as illustrated in the diagram below. f_act <= f_2 f_act > f_2 r269 Threshold freq f_ [Hz] P257.D (30.00) Delay time of f _ [ms] P258.D (0) f_act Tconst. speed filt [ms] P253.D (5) Threshold freq f_ [Hz] P257.D (30.00) 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) T 0 T 0 f_act <= f_2 r298 Bit00 f_act > f_2 0 r298 Bit0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) Delay time of f _ [ms] P258.D (0) p258[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_2 / Delay time of f_2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_2 (P257). This is the time delay before status bits are cleared. See diagram in P257 (threshold frequency f_2) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 277

278 { {.9 List of p259[0...2] Threshold frequency f_3 / Threshold freq f_3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds. f_act <= f_3 f_act > f_3 r269 Threshold freq f_ [Hz] P259.D (30.00) Delay time of f _ [ms] P260.D (0) f_act Tconst. speed filt [ms] P253.D (5) Threshold freq f_ [Hz] P259.D (30.00) 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) T 0 T 0 f_act <= f_3 r298 Bit02 f_act > f_3 0 r298 Bit03 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] P250.D (3.00) Delay time of f _ [ms] P260.D (0) p260[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_3 / Delay time of f_3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_3 (P259). This is the time delay before status bits are set. See diagram in P259 (threshold frequency f_3) 278 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

279 .9 List of p26[0...2] Min. threshold for freq. setp. / Setp.min.threshold G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Minimum threshold value for comparing speed or frequency setpoint. f_set <= P26 Setp.min.threshold [Hz] p26.d (3.00) f_set f_set <= p26 { 0 r298 Bit04 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] p250.d (3.00) f_set > 0 0 { r298 Bit05 f_set > 0 Hyst. freq. f_hys [Hz] p250.d (3.00) p262[0...2] Hysteresis freq. for overspeed / Overspd. hyst.freq G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Hysteresis speed (or frequency) for overspeed-detection as illustrated in the diagram below. f_act > f_max Max. frequency [Hz] p082.d (50.00) f_act f_act > f_max { 0 r297 Bit06 Overspd. hyst.freq [Hz] p262.d (20.00) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 279

280 .9 List of p263[0...2] Entry freq. for perm. deviation / Entry freq. deviat G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Threshold for detecting speed deviation from setpoint. See diagram in P264. p264[0...2] Hysteresis frequency deviation / Hyster freq deviat G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Hysteresis frequency for detecting permitted deviation (from setpoint) or frequency or speed. This frequency controls bit 8 in status word (r0052) and bit 6 in status word 2 (r0053). f_act == f_set Entry freq. deviat [Hz] p263.d (3.00) Delay_T perm. dev [ms] p265.d (0) f_act 0 T f_act == f_set + f_set { 0 r297 Bit07 r0052 Bit08 r0053 Bit06 Hyster freq deviat [Hz] p264.d (3.00) p265[0...2] Delay time permitted deviation / Delay_T perm. dev. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Delay time for detecting permitted deviation of speed or frequency from setpoint. See diagram in P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

281 .9 List of p266[0...2] Delay time ramp up completed / Delay_T rampupcmpl G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Delay time for signal that indicates completion of ramp-up. See diagram in P274. p267[0...2] Switch-off frequency f_off / SwOff freq. f_off G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines the threshold of the monitoring function f_act > P267 (f_off). P267 influences following functions: If the actual frequency falls below this threshold and the time delay has expired, bit in status word 2 (r0053) is reset. If a OFF or OFF3 was applied and bit is reset the inverter will disable the pulse (OFF2). ON OFF/OFF3 t f f act OFF/OFF3 p267 t f_act > p267 r0053 Bit 0 0 OFF2 Inactive Active p268 p268 p268 t t Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 28

282 .9 List of p268[0...2] Delay time T_off / Delay time T_off G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Dependency: Defines time for which the inverter may operate below switch-off frequency (P267) before switch off occurs. Active if holding brake (P25) not parameterized. See diagram in P267 (switch-off frequency) r269 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt. freq G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Filtered speed (or frequency) for monitoring behind first-order lowpass filter. p270[0...2] Threshold current I_thresh / Threshold current G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 00.0 Defines threshold current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to be used in comparisons of I_act and I_Thresh as illustrated in the diagram below. I_act > I_thresh I_act 0 T I_act > I_thresh 0 r0053 Bit03 Threshold current [%] P270.D (00.0) Delay time current [ms] P27.D (0) This threshold controls bit 3 in status word 3 (r0053). p27[0...2] Delay time current / Delay time current G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Defines delay time prior to activation of current comparison. 282 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

283 .9 List of See diagram in P270 (threshold current I_thresh) p272[0...2] Threshold DC-link voltage / Vdc threshold G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 2000 [] 800 Defines DC link voltage to be compared to actual voltage as illustrated in the diagram below. V dc p272 V dc_act < p272 t r0053 Bit07 0 V dc_act > p272 p273 t r0053 Bit08 0 t p273 This voltage controls bits 7 and 8 in status word 3 (r0053). p273[0...2] Delay time DC-link voltage / Vdc delay time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Defines delay time prior to activation of threshold comparison. See diagram in P272 (threshold DC-link voltage) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 283

284 .9 List of p274[0...2] Torque threshold M_thresh / Torque threshold G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 5.3 Defines torque threshold for comparing actual torque. M_act > M_thresh M_actNoAcc > M_thresh Delay time torque [ms] p276.d (0) M_act > M_thresh r298 Bit0 M_act 0 Entry freq. deviat [Hz] P263.D (3.00) Delay_T rampupcmpl Torque threshold [ms] p266.d (0) [Nm] p274.d (5.3) T 0 T 0 Ramp-up completed (active-high) SET (Q=) Q & M_actNoAcc > M_thresh r298 Bit09 f_act + { 0 RFG active RESET (Q=0) Q Priority RESET 2 SET f_set Hyster freq deviat [Hz] p264.d (3.00) p276[0...2] Delay time for torque threshold / Delay time torque G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Delay time for comparing actual torque to threshold. p277[0...2] Delay time for motor is blocked / Delay_T MotBlocked G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Delay time for identification that motor is blocked. 284 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

285 .9 List of p278[0...2] Delay time for motor pulled out / Delay_T MotPullOut G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 0 Delay time for identification that motor is pulled out. If the Encoder is enabled (P0400 > 0) and the Motor Holding Brake is enabled (P25 > 0), then in order to stop encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, the delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P278 > P26 and P278 > P27). p279 Current limit for no load ident. / Cur.lim:no-load ID G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] 0.0 [] 3.0 Threshold current for A0922 (load missing) in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) as illustrated in the diagram below. Load missing I_act 0 Pulse_enable Cur.lim:no-load ID [%] p279 (3.0) & T 0 Load missing r297 Bit V_act Load missing delay [ms] P280 (2000) 0 0 Notice: If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P279) is not exceeded, Alarm A0922 (no load applied) is issued when delay time (P280) expires. It may be that the motor is not connected (load missing) or a phase could be missing. p280 Delay time for load missing / Load missing delay G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 0000 [] 2000 Delay time load missing Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 285

286 .9 List of Notice: If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P279) is not exceeded, alarm A0922 (no load applied) is issued when delay time (P280) expires. It may be that the motor is not connected (load missing) or a phase could be missing. See diagram in P279 (current limit for no load identification). p28[0...2] Belt failure detection mode / Belt fail detect G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Sets belt failure detection mode. This function allows detection of mechanical failure of the drive train, e.g. a broken drive belt. It can also detect conditions which cause an overload, such as a jam. P are set to default when this parameter is changed from 0. This is achieved by comparing the actual frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (see P282 - P290). If the curve falls outside the envelope, a warning or trip is generated. Values: 0: Belt failure detection disabled : Warning: Low torque / speed 2: Warning: High torque / speed 3: Warning: High / low torque / speed 4: Trip: Low torque / speed 5: Trip: High torque / speed 6: Trip: High / low torque / speed 286 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

287 .9 List of p282[0...2] Belt threshold frequency / Belt threshold f_ G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets a frequency threshold for comparing actual torque to torque the envelope for belt failure detection. The frequency torque envelope is defined by 9 parameters - 3 are frequency parameters (P282 - P284), and the other 6 define the low and high torque limits (P285 - P290) for each frequency (see diagram below). Torque [Nm] p082 Max. frequency p289 Upper torque threshold 3 p290 Lower torque threshold 3 p287 Upper torque threshold 2 p288 Lower torque threshold 2 p285 Upper torque threshold p286 Lower torque threshold p282 Threshold frequency p283 Threshold frequency 2 Boundary zones De-activated monitoring Frequency [Hz] p284 Threshold frequency 3 Envelope curve Active monitoring The allowed frequency/torque region is defined by the shaded area. When the torque falls outside the area shown, a trip or warning occurs (see parameter P28). Below the the threshold in p282 and above the threshold in p284, belt failure detection mode is not active. In this case the values for normal operation with the torque limits given in p52 and p520 are valid. p283[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 2 / Belt threshold f_2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets a threshold F2 for comparing actual torque to torque the envelope for belt failure detection. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 287

288 .9 List of See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p284[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 3 / Belt threshold f_3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets a threshold F3 for comparing actual torque to torque the envelope for belt failure detection. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p285[0...2] Upper torque threshold / Upper trq. thresh G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] Upper limit threshold value for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p286[0...2] Lower torque threshold / Lower trq. thresh G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Lower limit threshold value for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p287[0...2] Upper torque threshold 2 / Upper trq. thresh2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] Upper limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). 288 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

289 .9 List of p288[0...2] Lower torque threshold 2 / Lower trq. thresh2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Lower limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p289[0...2] Upper torque threshold 3 / Upper trq. thresh3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] Upper limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p290[0...2] Lower torque threshold 3 / Lower trq. thresh3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Lower limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque. See P282 (belt threshold frequency ). p292[0...2] Time delay for belt failure / Belt fail delay_t G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 [] 65 [] 0 P292 defines a delay before warning/trip becomes active. It is used to eliminate events caused by transient conditions. It is used for both methods of fault detection. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 289

290 .9 List of r297 CO/BO: Monitoring word / Monitor Wd G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Monitoring word which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 f_act <= P080 (f_min) Yes No - 0 f_act <= P255 (f_) Yes No - 02 f_act > P255 (f_) Yes No - 03 f_act > zero Yes No - 04 f_act >= setp. (f_set) Yes No - 05 f_act <= P267 (f_off) Yes No - 06 f_act >= P082 (f_max) Yes No - 07 f_act == setp. (f_set) Yes No - 08 Act. current r0068 <= P270 Yes No - 09 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P272 Yes No - 0 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P272 Yes No - Load missing Yes No - r298 CO/BO: Monitoring word 2 / Monitor Wd2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Monitoring word 2 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 f_act <= P257 (f_2) Yes No - 0 f_act > P257 (f_2) Yes No - 02 f_act <= P259 (f_3) Yes No - 03 f_act > P259 (f_3) Yes No - 04 f_set < P26 (f_min_set) Yes No - 05 f_set > 0 Yes No - 06 Motor blocked Yes No - 07 Motor pulled out Yes No - 08 I_act r0068 < P270 Yes No - 09 m_act > P274 & setpoint reached Yes No - 0 m_act > P274 Yes No - Belt failure warning Yes No - 2 Belt failure trip Yes No - p2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller / Enab. PID ctrl G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 PID mode Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to enables the PID closed-loop controller. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 290 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

291 .9 List of Dependency: Setting automatically disables normal ramp times set in P20 and P2 and the normal frequency setpoints. Following an OFF or OFF3 command, however, the inverter frequency will ramp down to zero using the ramp time set in P2 (P35 for OFF3). When Standard Telegram 350 and ProfiBus selected(p0700 = 6, p922 = 350), parameter can not be changed. Notice: The minimum and maximum motor frequencies (P080 and P082) as well as the skip frequencies (P09 to P094) remain active on the inverter output. However, enabling skip frequencies with PID control can produce instabilities. The PID setpoint source is selected using P2253. The PID setpoint and the PID feedback signal are interpreted as [%] values (not [Hz]). The output of the PID controller is displayed as [%] and then normalized into [Hz] through P2000 (reference frequency) when PID is enabled. The reverse command is not active whilst PID is active. p220[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint / Fixed PID setp. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Defines Fixed PID Setpoint In addition, you can set any of the digital input parameters to fixed PID setpoint (FF-PID) via the digital inputs. There are 2 selection modes for the PID fixed setpoint: Example: 25. Direct selection (P226 = ): 26. Binary coded selection (P226 = 2): Direct selection of PID-FF P220 via DI0: Dependency: P2200 = required in user access level 2 to enable setpoint source. r2225 must be connected to P840 to start. P220 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2202[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 2 / Fixed PID setp. 2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 29

292 .9 List of See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p2203[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 3 / Fixed PID setp. 3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 3 See P220 fixed PID setpoint (FF-PID ). p2204[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 4 / Fixed PID setp. 4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 4 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p2205[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 5 / Fixed PID setp. 5 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 5 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p2206[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 6 / Fixed PID setp. 6 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 6 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). 292 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

293 .9 List of p2207[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 7 / Fixed PID setp. 7 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 7 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p2208[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 8 / Fixed PID setp. 8 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 8 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p2209[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 9 / Fixed PID setp. 9 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 9 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p220[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 0 / Fixed PID setp. 0 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 0 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 293

294 .9 List of p22[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint / Fixed PID setp. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p222[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 2 / Fixed PID setp. 2 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 2 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p223[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 3 / Fixed PID setp. 3 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 3 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p224[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 4 / Fixed PID setp. 4 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 4 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). 294 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

295 .9 List of p225[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 5 / Fixed PID setp. 5 G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 5 See P220 (Fixed PID Setpoint ). p226 Fixed PID setpoint mode / Fix.PID Mode G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 2 Fixed frequencies for PID setpoint can be selected in two different modes. Parameter P226 defines the mode. Values: : Direct selection 2: Binary selection p2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 / PID setp->bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:3 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 0 Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 / PID setp->bit 0 G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:3 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 0 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 295

296 .9 List of = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit / PID setp->bit G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T p222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit / PID setp->bit G20 (CU240S DP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T Recommendation: 0:0 Max bico 722:4 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit. Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 0:0 Max bico 722:4 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit. Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 296 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

297 .9 List of p2222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 / PID setp->bit 2 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T p2222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 / PID setp->bit 2 G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 722:5 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 2 Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) 0:0 Max bico 722:5 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 2 Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->bit 3 G20 (CU240S DP- Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 F) Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 3 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 297

298 .9 List of = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->bit 3 G20 (CU240S DP), Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 G20 (CU240S) Can be changed: T Recommendation: 0:0 Max bico 722:6 Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 3 Recommendation: = Digital input 0 (requires P070 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Digital input (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 2 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 3 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 4 (requires P0705 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 5 (requires P0706 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 6 (requires P0707 to be set to 99, BICO) = Digital input 7 (requires P0708 to be set to 99, BICO) 722. = Analog Input 0 used as Digital input (requires P072 to be set to 99, BICO) = Analog Input used as Digital input (requires P073 to be set to 99, BICO) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) r2224 CO: Act. fixed PID setpoint / Fixed.PID setp G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays total output of PID fixed setpoint selection. R2224 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex r2225 BO: PID Fixed frequency status / PID FF Status G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the status of PID fixed frequencies. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Status of FF Yes No - p223[0...2] Setpoint memory of PID-MOP / PID-MOP setp. mem. G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Setpoint memory 298 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

299 .9 List of Values: 0: PID-MOP setpoint will not be stored : PID-MOP setpoint will be stored (P2240 is updated) Dependency: P223 = 0: If 0 selected, setpoint returns to value set in P2240 (setpoint of PID-MOP) after an OFF command. P223 = : If is selected, active setpoint is 'remembered' and P2240 updated with current value. See P2240 (setpoint of PID-MOP) p2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP / Inhib. PID-MOD rev G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 Inhibits reverse setpoint selection when PID motor potentiometer is chosen either as a main setpoint or additional setpoint. Values: 0: Reverse direction is allowed : Reverse direction inhibited Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease frequency either by using digital inputs or motor potentiometer up/down buttons. p2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) / PID-MOP (UP) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9:3 Dependency: p2235[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines source of UP command. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) To change setpoint:. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or 2. Set P0702/P0703 = 3/4 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3) BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) / PID-MOP (UP) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:3 Dependency: Defines source of UP command. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) To change setpoint:. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or 2. Set P0702/P0703 = 3/4 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 299

300 .9 List of p2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) / PID-MOP (DWN) G20 (CU240S) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 9:4 Dependency: p2236[0...2] G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines source of DOWN command. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) To change setpoint:. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or 2. Set P0702/P0703 = 3/4 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3) BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) / PID-MOP (DWN) Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: T 0:0 Max bico 2090:4 Dependency: Defines source of DOWN command. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) To change setpoint:. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or 2. Set P0702/P0703 = 3/4 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3) p2240[0...2] Setpoint of PID-MOP / Setp. of PID-MOP G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Setpoint of the motor potentiometer. Allows user to set a digital PID setpoint in [%]. P2240 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP / MOP outp. setp G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays output setpoint of motor potentiometer in [%]. If the PID-MOP is enabled by short pulses of less than second, the output is changed in steps of 0.2 %. r2250 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex 300 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

301 .9 List of p225 PID mode / PID mode G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Enables function of PID controller. Values: 0: PID as setpoint : PID as trim Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200). Application Control structure SUM setpoint AFM RFG Motor control 3 v Variable speed drive (VSD) 2 p 2 * p 2 PID setpoint PID feedback PID RFG PID PID limit AFM RFG Motor control p 2 PID control v 2 * SUM setpoint AFM RFG Motor control 4 v 2 v x 2 x 2 * x 2 PID setpoint PID feedback PID RFG PID PID limit Dancer control P2200 = 0:0 2) P225 = 0 P2200 = :0 2) P225 = 0 P2200 = 0:0 ) P225 = P2200 = :0 ) P225 = SUM VSD ) will take change with drive running 2) change only taken when drive stopped VSD Setpoint via PID controller Dancer control PID control RFG ON: active OFF/3: active ON: - OFF/3: active ON: active OFF/3: active ON: active OFF/3: active PID-RFG ON: - OFF/3: - ON: active OFF/3: - ON: - OFF/3: - ON: active OFF/3: active Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 30

302 .9 List of p2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint / PID setpoint G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input. This parameter allows the user to select the source of the PID setpoint. Normally, a digital setpoint is selected either using a fixed PID setpoint or an active setpoint. 755 = Analog input = Fixed PI setpoint (see P220 to P2207) 2250 = Active PI setpoint (see P2240) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source / PID trim source G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Recommendation: Recommendation: Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint. 755 = Analog input = Fixed PI setpoint (see P220 to P2207) 2250 = Active PI setpoint (see P2240) [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p2255 PID setpoint gain factor / PID setp.gain fact G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Gain factor for PID setpoint. The PID setpoint input is multiplied by this gain factor to produce a suitable ratio between setpoint and trim. p2256 PID trim gain factor / PID trim gain fact G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Gain factor for PID trim. This gain factor scales the trim signal, which is added to the main PID setpoint. 302 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

303 .9 List of p2257 Ramp-up time for PID setpoint / PID setp. ramp-up G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [].00 Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint. PID Setpoint (%) 00 % x 2 x 0 p2257 t 2 t (s) x2 x t2 = P % Dependency: P2200 = (PID control is enabled) disable normal ramp-up time (P20). Notice: PID ramp time effective only on PID setpoint and only active when PID setpoint is changed or when RUN command is given (when PID setpoint uses this ramp to reach its value from 0 %). Setting the ramp-up time too short may cause the inverter to trip, on overcurrent for example. p2258 Ramp-down time for PID setpoint / PID setp. ramp-dwn G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [].00 Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint. PID Setpoint (%) 00 % x 2 x 0 p2258 t 2 t (s) x x2 t2 = P % Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 303

304 .9 List of Dependency: P2200 = (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-up time (P20). PID setpoint ramp effective only on PID setpoint changes. P2 (ramp-down time) and P35 (OFF3 ramp-down time) define the ramp times used after OFF and OFF3 respectively. Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip on overvoltage F0002 / overcurrent F000. r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG / PID setp <-RFG G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays total active PID setpoint after PID-RFG in [%]. r2260 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p226 PID setpoint filter timeconstant / PID setp.filt.tcon G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Sets a time constant for smoothing the PID setpoint. p226 =0 = no smoothing r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG / Filt. PID setp G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays filtered PID setpoint after PID-RFG in [%]. r2262 is the result of the value in r2260, filttered with PT-Filter and the time constant given in p226 r2262 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2263 PID controller type / PID ctrl. type G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Sets the PID controller type. Values: 0: D component on feedback signal : D component on error signal p2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback / PID feedback G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Recommendation: Selects the source of the PID feedback signal. 755 = Analog input setpoint 2224 = Fixed PID setpoint 2250 = Output setpoint of PID-MOP 304 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

305 .9 List of [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) When analog input is selected, offset and gain can be implemented using parameters P0756 to P0760 (AI scaling). p2265 PID feedback filter timeconstant / Fdbck.filt. Tconst G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 0.00 Defines time constant for PID feedback filter. r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback / PID filt.fdbck G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays PID feedback signal in [%]. r2266 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2267 Max. value for PID feedback / PID fdbck max. val G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%]. Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = ) and the signal rises above this value, the inverter will trip with F0222. p2267 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2268 Min. value for PID feedback / PID fdbck min. val G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%]. Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = ) and the signal rises below this value, the inverter will trip with F022. P2268 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2269 Gain applied to PID feedback / PID feedback gain G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Allows the user to scale the PID feedback as a percentage value [%]. A gain of 00.0 % means that feedback signal has not changed from its default value. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 305

306 .9 List of p2270 PID feedback function selector / PID fdbck fnct sel G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Applies mathematical functions to the PID feedback signal, allowing multiplication of the result by P2269 (gain applied to PID feedback). Values: 0: Disabled : Square root (root(x)) 2: Square (x*x) 3: Cube (x*x*x) p227 PID transducer type / PID trans. type G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Allows the user to select the transducer type for the PID feedback signal. Values: 0: Disabled : Inversion of PID feedback signal Notice: It is essential that you select the correct tranducer type. If you are unsure whether 0 or is applicable, you can determine the correct type as follows: 27. Disable the PID function (P2200 = 0). 28. Increase the motor frequency while measuring the feedback signal. 29. If the feedback signal increases with an increase in motor frequency, the PID transducer type should be If the feedback signal decreases with an increase in motor frequency the PID transducer type should be set to. r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback / PID scal fdbck G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays PID scaled feedback signal in [%]. r2272 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex r2273 CO: PID error / PID error G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays PID error (difference) signal between setpoint and feedback signals in [%]. r2273 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex 306 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

307 .9 List of p2274 PID derivative time / PID deriv. time G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Sets PID derivative time. P2274 = 0: The derivative term does not have any effect (it applies a gain of ). p2280 PID proportional gain / PID prop. gain G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller. The PID controller is implemented using the standard model. P2293 p229 p2280 p2285 PID setpoint + - Kp Tn y x Motor control r2262 r2273 r2294 PID feedback p2267 p2268 y x r2272 p2292 p2293 For best results, enable both P and I terms. Dependency: P2280 = 0 (P term of PID = 0): I term acts on the square of the error signal. P2285 = 0 (I term of PID = 0): PID controller acts as a P or PD controller respectively. If the system is prone to sudden step changes in the feedback signal, P term should normally be set to a small value (0.5) with a faster I term for optimum performance. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 307

308 .9 List of p2285 PID integral time / PID integral time G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Sets integral time constant for PID controller. See P2280 (PID proportional gain). p229 PID output upper limit / PID outp.upper lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%]. Dependency: If F max (P082) is greater than P2000 (reference frequency), either P2000 or P229 (PID output upper limit) must be changed to achieve F max. P229 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex (as defined by P2000 (reference frequency)). p2292 PID output lower limit / PID outp.lower lim G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%]. Dependency: A negative value allows bipolar operation of PID controller. P2292 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2293 Ramp-up /-down time of PID limit / PID lim. ramp time G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [].00 Sets maximum ramp rate on output of PID. When PI is enabled, the output limits are ramped up from 0 to the limits set in P229 (PID output upper limit) and P2292 (PID output lower limit). Limits prevent large step changes appearing on the output of the PID when the inverter is started. Once the limits have been reached, the PID controller output is instantaneous. These ramp times are used whenever a RUN command is issued. If an OFF or OFF 3 are issued, the inverter output frequency ramps down as set in P2 (ramp-down time) or P35 (OFF3 ramp-down time). r2294 CO: Act. PID output / Act.PID output G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Displays PID output in [%] 308 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

309 .9 List of r2294 = 00 % corresponds to 4000 hex p2295 Gain applied to PID output / PID output scale G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Allows the user to scale the PID output as a percentage value [%]. A gain of 00.0 % means that output signal has not changed from its default value. p2350 PID autotune enable / PID autotune G20 Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Enables autotune function of PID controller. Values: 0: PID autotuning disabled : PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard 2: PID autotuning as plus some overshoot (O/S) 3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S) 4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200). P2350 = This is the standard Ziegler Nichols (ZN) tuning which should be a quarter damped response to a step. P2350 = 2 This tuning will give some overshoot (O/S) but should be faster than option P2350 = 3 This tuning should give little or no overshoot but will not be as fast as option 2. P2350 = 4 This tuning only changes values of P and I and should be a quarter damped response. The option to be selected depends on the application but braodly speaking option will give an all round good respsonse, whereas if a faster response is desired option 2 should be selected. If no overshoot is desired then option 3 is the choice. For cases where no D term is wanted then option 4 can be selected. The tuning procedure is the same for all options. It is just the calculation of P,I and D values that is different. After autotune this parameter is set to zero (autotune completed). Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 309

310 .9 List of p2354 PID tuning timeout length / PID tuning t/o. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 60 [] [] 240 This parameter determines the time that the auto tuning code will wait before aborting a tuning run if no oscillation has been obtained. p2355 PID tuning offset / PID tuning offset G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.00 [] [] 5.00 Sets applied offset and deviation for PID autotuning. This can be varied depending on plant conditions e.g. a very long system time constant might require a larger value. p2480[0...2] BI: Enable positioning ramp down / Enable positioning G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Defines the source signal for enabling/disabling positioning. [0] = Command Dataset 0 (CDS0) [] = Command Dataset (CDS) [2] = Command Dataset 2 (CDS2) p248[0...2] Gearbox ratio input / Gearbox ratio in G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines the ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox output shaft. Motor Gear Load Ü n Motor n Load Ü = Motor revolutions Load revolutions P248 = P Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

311 .9 List of p2482[0...2] Gearbox ratio output / Gearbox ratio out G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Defines the ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox output shaft. p2484[0...2] No. of shaft turns = Unit / Position ref. unit G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets the number of rotations of the motor shaft required to represent unit of user selected units. Pulley radius r Load Distance s U Motor P2484= s U = No. of revolutions [unit] The following equation determines the number of motor shaft revolutions to stop: Revolutions Motor P248 = P2488 P2484 P2482 p2487[0...2] Positional error trim value / Positional error G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Offset error correction due to mechanical errors. Negative value entered when final position is before required end point. Positive value entered when final postioin is after the required end point. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 3

312 .9 List of p2488[0...2] Distance / No. of revolutions / Distance / No. rev G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T Sets the required distance or number of revolutions (see P2484). Motor Gear f OFF f OFF s = P2488= f. OFF t P t t P2488 r2489 CO: Remaining number of shaft revolutions / Remaining no. of s G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point Displays the remaining number of shaft revolutions since trigger of positioning. Positioning down ramp is an open loop control mode (no position controller available). This can cause differences between the calculated position, displayed in r2489, and the actual position. That means although the final position is already reached, r2489 could still display a residual distance. p2800 Enable FFBs / Enable FFBs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T 0 0 Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps. 3. Parameter P2800 enables all free function blocks, normally (P2800 = ). 32. P280 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P280[x] > 0 or P2802[x] > 0). Values: 0: Disable : Enable Dependency: All active function blocks will be calculated in every 32 ms. 32 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

313 .9 List of p280[0...6] Activate FFBs / Activate FFBs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps. 33. Parameter P2800 enables all free function blocks, normally (P2800 = ). 34. P280 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P280[x] > 0 or P2802[x] > 0). In addition, P280 and P2802 determine the chronological order of each function block. The following table shows that the priority increases from left to right and from bottom to top. Level 3 Level 2 Level Inactive 0 low Priority 2 high p2802 [3] CMP 2 p2802 [2] CMP p2802 [] DIV 2 p2802 [0] DIV p2802 [9] MUL 2 p2802 [8] MUL p2802 [7] SUB 2 p2802 [6] SUB p2802 [5] ADD 2 p2802 [4] ADD p2802 [3] Timer 4 p2802 [2] Timer 3 p2802 [] Timer 2 p2802 [0] Timer p280 [6] RS-FF 3 p280 [5] RS-FF 2 p280 [4] RS-FF p280 [3] D-FF 2 p280 [2] D-FF p280 [] NOT 3 p280 [0] NOT 2 p280 [9] NOT p280 [8] XOR 3 p280 [7] XOR 2 p280 [6] XOR p280 [5] OR 3 p280 [4] OR 2 p280 [3] OR p280 [2] AND 3 p280 [] AND 2 p280 [0] AND low Priority Values: 0: Not Active : Level 2: Level 2 3: Level 3 Example: P280[3] = 2, P280[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2 FFBs will be calculated in following order: P2802[3], P280[3], P280[4], P2802[4] [0] = Enable AND [] = Enable AND 2 [2] = Enable AND 3 [3] = Enable OR [4] = Enable OR 2 [5] = Enable OR 3 [6] = Enable XOR [7] = Enable XOR 2 [8] = Enable XOR 3 [9] = Enable NOT [0] = Enable NOT 2 [] = Enable NOT 3 [2] = Enable D-FF [3] = Enable D-FF 2 [4] = Enable RS-FF [5] = Enable RS-FF 2 [6] = Enable RS-FF 3 Dependency: Set P2800 to to enable function blocks. All active function blocks will be calculated in every 32 ms. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 33

314 .9 List of p2802[0...3] Activate FFBs / Activate FFBs G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps. 35. Parameter P2800 enables all free function blocks, normally (P2800 = ). 36. P280 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P280[x] > 0 or P2802[x] > 0). In addition, P280 and P2802 determine the chronological order of each function block. The following table shows that the priority increases from left to right and from bottom to top. Level 3 Level 2 Level Inactive 0 low Priority 2 high p2802 [3] CMP 2 p2802 [2] CMP p2802 [] DIV 2 p2802 [0] DIV p2802 [9] MUL 2 p2802 [8] MUL p2802 [7] SUB 2 p2802 [6] SUB p2802 [5] ADD 2 p2802 [4] ADD p2802 [3] Timer 4 p2802 [2] Timer 3 p2802 [] Timer 2 p2802 [0] Timer p280 [6] RS-FF 3 p280 [5] RS-FF 2 p280 [4] RS-FF p280 [3] D-FF 2 p280 [2] D-FF p280 [] NOT 3 p280 [0] NOT 2 p280 [9] NOT p280 [8] XOR 3 p280 [7] XOR 2 p280 [6] XOR p280 [5] OR 3 p280 [4] OR 2 p280 [3] OR p280 [2] AND 3 p280 [] AND 2 p280 [0] AND low Priority Values: 0: Not Active : Level 2: Level 2 3: Level 3 Example: P280[3] = 2, P280[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2 FFBs will be calculated in following order: P2802[3], P280[3], P280[4], P2802[4] [0] = Enable timer [] = Enable timer 2 [2] = Enable timer 3 [3] = Enable timer 4 [4] = Enable ADD [5] = Enable ADD 2 [6] = Enable SUB [7] = Enable SUB 2 [8] = Enable MUL [9] = Enable MUL 2 [0] = Enable DIV [] = Enable DIV 2 [2] = Enable CMP [3] = Enable CMP 2 Dependency: Set P2800 to to enable function blocks. All active function blocks will be calculated in every 32 ms. 34 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

315 .9 List of p280[0...] BI: AND / AND G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P280[0], P280[] define inputs of AND element, output is P28. p2800 p280[0] p280 Index0 Index A B & C r28 A B C [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[0] is active level for the AND element. r28 BO: AND / AND G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of AND element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P280[0], P280[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[0] is active level for the AND element. p282[0...] BI: AND 2 / AND 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P282[0], 282[] define inputs of AND 2 element, output is P283. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[] is active level for the AND element. r283 BO: AND 2 / AND 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of AND 2 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P282[0], P282[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[] is active level for the AND element. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 35

316 .9 List of p284[0...] BI: AND 3 / AND 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P284[0], P284[] define inputs of AND 3 element, output is P285. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[2] is active level for the AND element. r285 BO: AND 3 / AND 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of AND 3 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P284[0], P284[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[2] is active level for the AND element. p286[0...] BI: OR / OR G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P286[0], P286[] define inputs of OR element, output is P287. p2800 p280[3] p286 Index0 Index A B C r287 A B C [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[3] is active level for the OR element. r287 BO: OR / OR G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of OR element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P286[0], P286[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[3] is active level for the OR element. 36 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

317 .9 List of p288[0...] BI: OR 2 / OR 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P288[0], P288[] define inputs of OR 2 element, output is P289. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[4] is active level for the OR element. r289 BO: OR 2 / OR 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of OR 2 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P288[0], P288[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[4] is active level for the OR element. p2820[0...] BI: OR 3 / OR 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2820[0], P2820[] define inputs of OR 3 element, output is P282. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[5] is active level for the OR element. r282 BO: OR 3 / OR 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of OR 3 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P2820[0], P2820[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[5] is active level for the OR element. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 37

318 .9 List of p2822[0...] BI: XOR / XOR G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2822[0], P2822[] define inputs of XOR element, output is P2823. p2800 p280[6] p2822 Index0 Index A B = C r2823 A B C [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[6] is active level for the XOR element. r2823 BO: XOR / XOR G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of XOR element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2822[0], P2822[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[6] is active level for the XOR element. p2824[0...] BI: XOR 2 / XOR 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2824[0], P2824[] define inputs of XOR 2 element, output is P2825. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[7] is active level for the XOR element. r2825 BO: XOR 2 / XOR 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of XOR 2 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2824[0], P2824[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[7] is active level for the XOR element. 38 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

319 .9 List of p2826[0...] BI: XOR 3 / XOR 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2826[0], P2826[] define inputs of XOR 3 element, output is P2827. [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0) [] = Binector input (BI ) Dependency: P280[8] is active level for the XOR element. r2827 BO: XOR 3 / XOR 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of XOR 3 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2826[0], P2826[]. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[8] is active level for the XOR element. p2828 BI: NOT / NOT G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2828 defines input of NOT element, output is P2829. p2800 p280[9] p2828 Index0 A r2829 C A C 0 0 Dependency: P280[9] is active level for the NOT element. r2829 BO: NOT / NOT G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of NOT element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2828. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[9] is active level for the NOT element. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 39

320 .9 List of p2830 BI: NOT 2 / NOT 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2830 defines input of NOT 2 element, output is P283. Dependency: P280[0] is active level for the NOT element. r283 BO: NOT 2 / NOT 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of NOT 2 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2830. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[0] is active level for the NOT element. p2832 BI: NOT 3 / NOT 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2832 defines input of NOT 3 element, output is P2833. Dependency: P280[] is active level for the NOT element. r2833 BO: NOT 3 / NOT 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Output of NOT 3 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2832. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[] is active level for the NOT element. 320 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

321 .9 List of p2834[0...3] BI: D-FF / D-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2834[0], P2834[], P2834[2], P2834[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop, outputs are P2835, P2836. p2800 p280[2] p2834 Index0 Index Index2 SET (Q=) D Q r2835 Index3 STOR E Q r2836 RESET (Q=0) SET RESET D STORE Q Q 0 x x 0 POWER ON 0 x x 0 x x Q n- Q n POWER-ON 0 Dependency: [0] = Binector input: Set [] = Binector input: D input [2] = Binector input: Store pulse [3] = Binector input: Reset P280[2] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. r2835 BO: Q D-FF / Q D-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of D-FlipFlop, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[], P2834[2], P2834[3] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[2] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. r2836 BO: NOT-Q D-FF / NOT-Q D-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[], P2834[2], P2834[3] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[2] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 32

322 .9 List of p2837[0...3] BI: D-FF 2 / D-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2837[0], P2837[], P2837[2], P2837[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 2, outputs are P2838, [0] = Binector input: Set [] = Binector input: D input [2] = Binector input: Store pulse [3] = Binector input: Reset Dependency: P280[3] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. r2838 BO: Q D-FF 2 / Q D-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[], P2837[2], P2837[3] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[3] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. r2839 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 2 / NOT-Q D-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[], P2837[2], P2837[3] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[3] is active level for the D-FlipFlop. p2840[0...] BI: RS-FF / RS-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2840[0], P2840[] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop, outputs are P284, P2842. p2800 p280[4] SET RESET Q Q p2840 Index 0 Index POWER ON SET (Q=) RESET (Q=0) Q Q r284 r Q n- Q n Q n- Q n- POWER-ON 0 Dependency: [0] = Binector input: Set [] = Binector input: Reset P280[4] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. 322 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

323 .9 List of r284 BO: Q RS-FF / Q RS-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of RS-FlipFlop, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[4] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. r2842 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF / NOT-Q RS-FF G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[4] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. p2843[0...] BI: RS-FF 2 / RS-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2843[0], P2843[] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 2, outputs are P2844, P2845. [0] = Binector input: Set [] = Binector input: Reset Dependency: P280[5] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. r2844 BO: Q RS-FF 2 / Q RS-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[5] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. r2845 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 2 / NOT-Q RS-FF 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[5] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. p2846[0...] BI: RS-FF 3 / RS-FF 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 P2846[0], P2846[] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 3, outputs are P2847, P2848. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 323

324 .9 List of Dependency: [0] = Binector input: Set [] = Binector input: Reset P280[6] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. r2847 BO: Q RS-FF 3 / Q RS-FF 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[6] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. r2848 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 3 / NOT-Q RS-FF 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[] Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P280[6] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop. 324 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

325 .9 List of p2849 BI: Timer / Timer G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Define input signal of timer. P2849, P2850, P285 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853. p2800 p p2850 (0. 000) Delay Time p285 (0) Mode ON Delay T 0 0 p2849 Index0 I n OFF Delay 0 T ON/OFF Delay 2 T T Pulse Gernerator T 3 Ou t r2852 NOu t r2853 In Out p285 = 0 (ON Delay) p2850 t t p285 = (OFF Delay) p2850 t p285 = 2 (ON-OFF Delay) p2850 p285 = 3 (Pulse Generator) p2850 t In Out p2850 In Out p2850 t t t t Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 325

326 .9 List of p2850 Delay time of timer / Delay time timer G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Defines delay time of timer. P2849, P2850, P285 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853. Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer. p285 Mode timer / Mode timer G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects mode of timer. P2849, P2850, P285 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853. Values: 0: ON delay (seconds) : OFF delay (seconds) 2: ON/OFF delay (seconds) 3: Pulse generator (seconds) 0: ON delay (minutes) : OFF delay (minutes) 2: ON/OFF delay (minutes) 3: Pulse generator (minutes) Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer. r2852 BO: Timer / Timer G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of timer. P2849, P2850, P285 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer. r2853 BO: Nout timer / Nout timer G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of timer. P2849, P2850, P285 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer. 326 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

327 .9 List of p2854 BI: Timer 2 / Timer 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Define input signal of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858. Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the timer. p2855 Delay time of timer 2 / Delay time timer 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Defines delay time of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858. Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the timer. p2856 Mode timer 2 / Mode timer 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects mode of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858. Values: 0: ON delay (seconds) : OFF delay (seconds) 2: ON/OFF delay (seconds) 3: Pulse generator (seconds) 0: ON delay (minutes) : OFF delay (minutes) 2: ON/OFF delay (minutes) 3: Pulse generator (minutes) Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the timer. r2857 BO: Timer 2 / Timer 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the timer. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 327

328 .9 List of r2858 BO: Nout timer 2 / Nout timer 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of timer 2 P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the timer. p2859 BI: Timer 3 / Timer 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Define input signal of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P286 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863. Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer. p2860 Delay time of timer 3 / Delay time timer 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Defines delay time of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P286 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863. Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer. p286 Mode timer 3 / Mode timer 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects mode of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P286 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863. Values: 0: ON delay (seconds) : OFF delay (seconds) 2: ON/OFF delay (seconds) 3: Pulse generator (seconds) 0: ON delay (minutes) : OFF delay (minutes) 2: ON/OFF delay (minutes) 3: Pulse generator (minutes) Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer. 328 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

329 .9 List of r2862 BO: Timer 3 / Timer 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P286 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer. r2863 BO: Nout timer 3 / Nout timer 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P286 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer. p2864 BI: Timer 4 / Timer 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 0:0 Define input signal of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868. Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer. p2865 Delay time of timer 4 / Delay time timer 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T 0.0 [] [] 0.0 Defines delay time of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868. Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer. p2866 Mode timer 4 / Mode timer 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: U, T Selects mode of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 329

330 .9 List of Values: 0: ON delay (seconds) : OFF delay (seconds) 2: ON/OFF delay (seconds) 3: Pulse generator (seconds) 0: ON delay (minutes) : OFF delay (minutes) 2: ON/OFF delay (minutes) 3: Pulse generator (minutes) Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer. r2867 BO: Timer 4 / Timer 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays output of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer. r2868 BO: Nout timer 4 / Nout timer 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays Not-output of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer. p2869[0...] CI: ADD / ADD G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Adder, result is in P2870. p2800 p2802[4] p2869 Index 0 Index x x 2 x + x2 200 % -200% Result r2870 Result = x + x2 x + x2 > If: 200% x + x2 < -200% Result = 200% Result = -200% [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[4] is the active level for the Adder. r2870 CO: ADD / ADD G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Adder. Dependency: P2802[4] is active level for the Adder. 330 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

331 .9 List of p287[0...] CI: ADD 2 / ADD 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Adder 2, result is in P2872. [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[5] is active level for the Adder. r2872 CO: ADD 2 / ADD 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Adder 2. Dependency: P2802[5] is active level for the Adder. p2873[0...] CI: SUB / SUB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Subtracter, result is in P2874. P2800 P2802[6] P2873 Index 0 Index x x 2 x - x2 200 % -200% Result r2874 Result = x - x2 If: x - x2 > 200% x - x2 < -200% Result = 200% Result = -200% [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[6] is active level for the Subtracter. r2874 CO: SUB / SUB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Subtracter. Dependency: P2802[6] is active level for the Subtracter. p2875[0...] CI: SUB 2 / SUB 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Subtracter 2, result is in P2876. [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[7] is active level for the Subtracter. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 33

332 .9 List of r2876 CO: SUB 2 / SUB 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Subtracter 2. Dependency: P2802[7] is active level for the Subtracter. p2877[0...] CI: MUL / MUL G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Multiplier, result is in P2878. p2877 Index 0 Index x x 2 p2800 x x2 00% p2802[8] 200% -200% Result r2878 x x2 Result = 00% x x2 If: > 200% Result = 200% 00% x x2 < -200% Result = -200% 00% [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[8] is active level for the Multiplier. r2878 CO: MUL / MUL G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Multiplier. Dependency: P2802[8] is active level for the Multiplier. p2879[0...] CI: MUL 2 / MUL 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Multiplier 2, result is in P2880. [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[9] is active level for the Multiplier. r2880 CO: MUL 2 / MUL 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Multiplier 2. Dependency: P2802[9] is active level for the Multiplier. 332 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

333 .9 List of p288[0...] CI: DIV / DIV G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Divider, result is in P2882. p288 Index 0 Index x x 2 p2800 p2802[0] x 00% X2 200% -200% Result r2882 x 00% Result = x2 x 00% If: > 200% x2 x 00% < - x2 200% Result = 200% Result = -200% [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the Divider. r2882 CO: DIV / DIV G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Divider. Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the Divider. p2883[0...] CI: DIV 2 / DIV 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Define inputs of Divider 2, result is in P2884. [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the Divider. r2884 CO: DIV 2 / DIV 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Result of Divider 2. Dependency: P2802[] is active level for the Divider. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 333

334 .9 List of p2885[0...] CI: CMP / CMP G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Defines inputs of Comparator, output is P2886. P2800 P2802[2] P2885 Index 0 Index x x 2 CMP Out r2886 x x2 Out = x < x2 Out = 0 Out = x x2 [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the Comparator. r2886 BO: CMP / CMP G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays result bit of Comparator. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the Comparator. p2887[0...] CI: CMP 2 / CMP 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0:0 Max bico 755:0 Defines inputs of Comparator 2, output is P2888. [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0) [] = Connector input (CI ) Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the Comparator. r2888 BO: CMP 2 / CMP 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned6 Displays result bit of Comparator 2. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Output of BO Yes No - Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the Comparator. 334 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

335 .9 List of p2889 CO: Fixed setpoint in [%] / Fixed setp % G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Fixed percent setting. Connector Setting in % p2889 p2890 Range : -200% % p2890 CO: Fixed setpoint 2 in [%] / Fixed setp 2 % G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: U, T [] [] 0.00 Fixed percent setting 2. r33 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) CO/BO: Fault Bit Array / Fault Bit Array Access level: P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Gives information about actual fault. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Inverter error Yes No - 0 Power line failure Yes No - 02 Intermediate circuit power voltage Yes No - 03 Error power electronics Yes No - 04 Convertor over temperature Yes No - 05 Earth leackage Yes No - 06 Motor overload Yes No - 07 Bus fault Yes No - 08 External safety failure Yes No - 09 Fault motor sensor Yes No - 0 Fault internal communication Yes No - Motor current limit Yes No - 2 Supply failure Yes No - 3 Reserved Yes No - 4 Reserved Yes No - 5 Other error Yes No - r33 G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO/BO: Fault Bit Array / Fault Bit Array Access level: P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Gives information about actual fault. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 335

336 .9 List of Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Inverter error Yes No - 0 Power line failure Yes No - 02 Intermediate circuit power voltage Yes No - 03 Error power electronics Yes No - 04 Convertor over temperature Yes No - 05 Earth leackage Yes No - 06 Motor overload Yes No - 07 Bus fault Yes No - 08 External safety failure Yes No - 09 Fault motor sensor Yes No - 0 Fault internal communication Yes No - Motor current limit Yes No - 2 Supply failure Yes No - 3 Reserved Yes No - 4 Reserved Yes No - 5 Other error Yes No - p3900 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) End of quick commissioning / Quick commiss. end Access level: P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0 0 Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation. After completion of calculation, P3900 and P000 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to their original value 0. Values: 0: No quick commissioning : End quick commissioning with factory reset 2: End quick commissioning 3: End quick commissioning only for motor data 0: Accept safety changes (only on safety CU) : Cancel safety changes (only on safety CU) Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning) 336 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

337 .9 List of P3900 = : When setting is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning", are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost. Motor calculations are also performed. P3900 = 2 : When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning" (P000 = ) are calculated. The I/O settings are also reset to default and the motor calculations performed. P3900 = 3 : When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed. Exiting quick commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been changed). When transferring parameter p3900, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor weight), P0350 (demagnetization time), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current). p3900 G20 (CU240S DP- F) End of quick commissioning / Quick commiss. end Access level: P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Quick comm. YES Activ: YES Dynamic index: - Can be changed: C2() 0 0 Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation. After completion of calculation, P3900 and P000 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to their original value 0. Values: 0: No quick commissioning : End quick commissioning with factory reset 2: End quick commissioning 3: End quick commissioning only for motor data 0: Accept safety changes (only on safety CU) : Cancel safety changes (only on safety CU) Dependency: Changeable only when P000 = (quick commissioning) Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 337

338 .9 List of P3900 = : When setting is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning", are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost. Motor calculations are also performed. P3900 = 2 : When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning" (P000 = ) are calculated. The I/O settings are also reset to default and the motor calculations performed. P3900 = 3 : When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed. Exiting quick commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been changed). When transferring parameter p3900, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus): Parameter fault 30 Drive fault 70 Drive fault 75 When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are being made. The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete. Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor weight), P0350 (demagnetization time), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current). P3900 = 0 (only on safety CU) Finishes the safety commissioning by accepting the safety changes. The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 5 s. P3900 = (only on safety CU) Finishes the safety commissioning by discarding the safety changes. The safety settings that were active before the safety commissioning are reloaded. The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 5 s. p3950 Access of hidden parameters / Access hidden par G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: U, T Accesses special parameters for development (expert only) and factory functionality (calibration parameter). r3954[0...2] CM info and GUI ID / CC info GUI ID G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Used to classify firmware (only for SIEMENS internal purposes). 338 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

339 .9 List of [0] = CM label (increment/branch) [] = CM label (counter) [2] = CM label [3] = GUI ID [4] = GUI ID [5] = GUI ID [6] = GUI ID [7] = GUI ID [8] = GUI ID [9] = GUI ID [0] = GUI ID [] = GUI ID major release [2] = GUI ID minor release r3955 Version for DriveMonitor / DriveMon. version G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Displays the version for DriveMonitor. r3978 BICO counter / BICO counter G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Counts the number of changed BICO links p3980 Commissioning command selection / Commiss. cmd. sel. G20 (CU240S) Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Toggles command and setpoint sources between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles for commissioning. The command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit selects the command source, the ones digit the setpoint source. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 339

340 .9 List of Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232 5: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS485 7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 0: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232 5: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS485 7: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter 4: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232 45: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS485 47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 50: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = BICO parameter 5: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 52: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 53: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 54: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS232 55: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS485 57: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 p3980 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S DP- F) Commissioning command selection / Commiss. cmd. sel. Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Toggles command and setpoint sources between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles for commissioning. The command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit selects the command source, the ones digit the setpoint source. 340 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

341 .9 List of Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232 6: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fieldbus 7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 0: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter : Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232 6: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fieldbus 7: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter 4: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint 42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency 44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232 46: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fieldbus 47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 60: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = BICO parameter 6: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = MOP setpoint 62: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint 63: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fixed frequency 64: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = USS on RS232 66: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fieldbus 67: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2 p398 Reset active fault / Reset active fault G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 Resets active faults when changed from 0 to. Values: 0: No fault reset : Reset fault See P0947 (last fault code) Automatically reset to 0. r3986[0...] Number of parameters / No. of parameters G20 Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Number of parameters on the drive [0] = Read only [] = Read & write r4740[0...9] Trace record data for signal / Trace data sig. G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 34

342 .9 List of r474[0...9] Trace record data for signal 2 / Trace data sig. 2 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 2 r4742[0...9] Trace record data for signal 3 / Trace data sig. 3 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 3 r4743[0...9] Trace record data for signal 4 / Trace data sig. 4 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 4 r4744[0...9] Trace record data for signal 5 / Trace data sig. 5 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 5 r4745[0...9] Trace record data for signal 6 / Trace data sig. 6 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 6 r4746[0...9] Trace record data for signal 7 / Trace data sig. 7 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 7 r4747[0...9] Trace record data for signal 8 / Trace data sig. 8 G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Trace Record data for signal 8 p4795 Sel. Trace Record block number / Sel. Trace Block G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: U, T 0000 hex 00E hex 0000 hex Select Trace Block to read. Each block consists of 0 trace record samples per channel 342 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

343 .9 List of p784[0...5] Power Modul serialno for hot swap check / PM Serialno G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Reads the power modul serial number, which is stored in the control unit. At power up these serial number are verified, if any swapping of the CU or the PM had been taken place. [0] = Production site [] = Production year after 2000 [2] = Production month [3] = Production day [4] = Production number per day [5] = Type - not used on all drives The parameter cannot be changed. p7844 Acceptance Test / Confirmation for CU / PM swap or Startup Clon / Ack Accept. Test G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 0 With this parameter the acceptance test can be acknowledged. After a CU / PM Swap or a startup clone this parameter will be automatically set to by the drive SW. Also a Fault F395 will be set. An acceptance test needs to be confirmed by setting this parameter back to 0. Values: 0: No Acceptance / Confirmation pending : Ack of Acceptance Test / Confirmation is pending On a safety board it is necessary to set the safety password before changing this parameter. P0 = 30 P976 = password p8458 Clone Control / Clone Control G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0 2 This parameter specifies whether a cloning at startup will be performed. The File clone00.bin will be used. If no MMC is inserted there will be a normal startup. Values: 0: No Startup Clone : Once Startup Clone 2: Always Startup Clone If a MMC is inserted without a valid file the drive will set a fault F6 / F63 which can only be cleared by a powercycle. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 343

344 .9 List of p8830[ ] Fieldbus internal name of station / FB int name of sta G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned8 Can be changed: T FIELDBUS internal name of station. p884[0...5] Fieldbus configuration data / FB conf data G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0000 hex FFFF hex 0000 hex FIELDBUS configuration data. p8849[0...5] Fieldbus rev configuration data / FB rev conf data G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T 0000 hex FFFF hex 0000 hex FIELDBUS reverse configuration data display. p8850[0...7] PZD from Fieldbus / PZD from FB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T PZD from FIELDBUS. p885[0...7] PZD to Fieldbus / PZD to FB G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T PZD to FIELDBUS. p8858[0...6] Fieldbus diagnostic data display / FB diag data displ G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T FIELDBUS diagnostic data display. 344 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

345 .9 List of p8859[0...7] Fieldbus identification data display / FB id data display G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T p960 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) FIELDBUS identification data display. SI enable parameter / SI enable Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: bin Safety parameter for enabling the individual safety control functions. Bit0 activates the forced dynamisation and processor selftest (test stop) on selection of the STO. Warning A699 can only be acknowledged when Bit0 is set. The switch-on of pulses is inhibited during the test (i.e. r0052 Bit06 = ) for approximately 3. seconds. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 reserved Yes No - 0 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No - STO Notice: The switch-off circuitry of the mechanical brake is tested during the forced dynamisation. For short periods (2ms - 6ms) the brake is controlled to open. In general the mechanical brake will require command signals longer than 20ms. Care should be taken if a brake is used that has a reaction time of less than 20ms. p960 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI enable parameter / SI enable Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: bin 0000 bin Safety parameter for enabling the individual safety control functions. Bit0 activates the forced dynamisation and processor selftest (test stop) on selection of the STO. Warning A699 can only be acknowledged when Bit0 is set. The switch-on of pulses is inhibited during the test (i.e. r0052 Bit06 = ) for approximately 3. seconds. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 reserved Yes No - 0 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No - STO Notice: The switch-off circuitry of the mechanical brake is tested during the forced dynamisation. For short periods (2ms - 6ms) the brake is controlled to open. In general the mechanical brake will require command signals longer than 20ms. Care should be taken if a brake is used that has a reaction time of less than 20ms. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 345

346 .9 List of p9602 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI enable safe brake monitoring / SI brake mon. ena Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: As long as P9602 is set to 0, there is no monitoring of the output level but switching on and off is still performed. The ability to shutdown is especially important when no brake is used, otherwise the absence of the brake module or the power contactor for the brake would be interpreted as a cable breakage and result in an alarm message. To enable monitoring of the safe brake control, set P9602 to. Values: 0: Disable monitoring of safe brake control : Enable monitoring of safe brake control The holding brake must be dimensioned so that should a fault occur the complete drive can be braked to zero from any possible operational speed. p9603 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Selection of Safety Source / SI Source select Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: bin Safety parameter for selection of the safety input signals. The safety input signals can be taken either from PROFIsafe or from the digital inputs of G20. Two digital inputs form one safety input. The first safety input consists of FDI0A and FDI0B, the second safety input consists of FDIA and FDIB. Using digital inputs, each safety input can be assigned to the safety functions "safe torque off (STO)", "safe stop (SS)" or "safely-limited speed (SLS)". Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 SLS activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 0 SLS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 02 SS activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 03 SS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 04 STO activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 05 STO activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 07 STO, SS, SLS activated via PROFIsafe Yes No - If Bit 7 =, all other bits must be set 0. p9650 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Safe Digital Input debounce delay time / SI Debounce FDI Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: - 0 [] 2000 [] 50 Defines the maximum allowed debounce delay between the two safe digital input pins. If both safe digital inputs are not consistent after this time a fault will be generated (60.08). 346 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

347 .9 List of p965 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Safe Digital Input filter delay time / SI Filt. delay FDI Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: - 0 [] 00 [] 5 p9659 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Defines the response time delay of the safe digital inputs. Signals that are shorter than the specified time are not processed as safety signals but ignored. Any noise occures shorter than filter time has no effect to level of safe digital inputs. Increasing/decreasing of the filter delay time has direct impact to the reaction time between triggering and activating the safety function. SI maximum time until test stop / SI test stop time Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: - 0. [] [] 8.0 The time interval between test stops is specified. The remaining time until a test stop is required is shown in r9660. When r9660 reaches zero, the time interval has expired and warning A699 is activated. The warning solely informs that a test stop is required. The user should activate a test stop on the next occasion. The drive functionality will not be affected by the warning. The test stop is activated in the following cases: after each power-up, on selecting the STO when Bit0 in p960/p980 is set, when leaving the latched safe torque off (LSTO). During the test stop the shutdown paths are checked and a processor selftest runs. The timer for the forced dynamisation (see r9660) is reset to the default value specified in p9659 and warning A699 is cleared under the following conditions: after reducing p9659 below the current value in r9660, after each power-up, on selecting the STO when Bit0 in p960/p980 is set and the test is complete, when leaving the LSTO when the test is complete. The default value is 8 hours. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 347

348 .9 List of For safety reasons, it is necessary to initiate the safe standstill as a test at intervals of maximum 8 hours in order to check the operability of the safety system. Thus, 8 hours after the last activation of the safe standstill the converter sets a status bit (r9772, Bit06) and generates warning A699. The process control (i.e. PLC) must then initiate the safe standstill at the next opportunity, for example, when the drive has already a short phase with zero speed. Provided the dynamisation has not been deactivated (see parameters p960/p980, Bit0), the safety hardware is tested once the safe standstill is active. If the converter returns the "Safe torque off (STO) selected" (r9772, Bit0) status signal, the safe standstill can be released again since part of the test is continued in the background. The immediate switch-on will be inhibited for approximately 2.4 seconds. Once the self test is complete the dynamisation bit (Bit06 of r9772) is cleared automatically. The higher level control (i.e. PLC) must log the setting and clearing of the status bit and the dynamisation bit. To detect errors while writing and storing safety-relevant data, the control should fetch cyclically at 8 hour intervals all safety-related parameters and compare them with the expected values. Should there be a difference, the safety signals (STO or SS) should be used to initiate a safe standstill and to issue a fault message. This action must also be logged appropriately. r9660 G20 (CU240S DP- F) p9680 G20 (CU240S DP- F) CO: SI remaining time until test stop / SI remaining time Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Parameter r9660 displays the remaining time until a test stop is required. When r9660 reaches zero, warning A699 is issued and status Bit06 in parameter r9772 is set. The warning A699 and Bit06 of r9772 are only cleared when the dynamisation has been completed (see description of p9659). The resetting of r9660 to the value in p9659 will take place once the dynamisation has finished. The resolution of r9660 is 0. hour or 6 minutes. SI braking ramp delay / SI braking delay Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: - 0 [] [] 250 Time [in ms] between selecting the safe braking ramp (SBR) and the activation of the monitoring ramp. The actual frequency is compared to the frequency of the monitoring ramp when the SBR is active. If the actual frequency exceeds that of the monitoring ramp, an latched safe torge off (LSTO) is generated. For applications with changing loads, an increase of p9680/p9880 or p969/p989 is recommended. A larger deviation of the actual frequency from the reference is then acceptable. A value of deactivates the SBR monitoring. Set p9880 accordingly. The ramping on selection of SLS or SS will however still follow the ramping time in p968/p Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

349 .9 List of p968 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI braking ramp down time / SI ramp down time Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: - 00 [] [] 0000 Defines the braking ramp down time for the safe braking ramp (SBR) in seconds. The ramp down time is used for the SBR and the monitoring ramp. The total braking time Tx can be derived where fx is the current frequency according to the following formulas: a) For activation of the SLS: Tx = p968 * (fx - p9690) / 200Hz p9682 G20 (CU240S DP- F) b) For activation of SS: Tx = p968 * (fx - p9682) / 200Hz In contrast to other ramping times (e.g. p20, p2), the safety braking time is referred to 200Hz and not to p082. See formulas above. SI minimum speed for standstill detection / SI min standstill Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] 20.0 [] 5.0 p9690 G20 (CU240S DP- F) A speed below the threshold of p9682/p9882 is considered standstill. If the SS has been selected, the safe standstill (STO) will be activated. SI setpoint for SLS / SI setpoint SLS Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] 0.0 Speed setpoint that is used when the safely limited speed (SLS) is selected. Depending on the setting in p9692/p9892 the frequency of p9690/p9890 may also serve as a speed threshold instead of a setpoint. (see p9692) For applications with changing loads, an increase of p9680/p9880 or p969/p989 is recommended. If the "safely limited speed" (SLS) is selected while the actual speed is below the setpoint value, Bit04 and Bit05 will be set simultanously in r9772. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 349

350 .9 List of p969 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI tolerance for SLS / SI tolerance SLS Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] 3.0 p9692 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Upper tolerance margin for the SLS. If the actual frequency at initiation of the safely limited speed lies below the value of p969/p989 and later on exceeds that value an latched safe torque off (LSTO) is generated. The tolerance defined by the difference p969 - p9690 (or p989 - p9890) is also used for the monitoring ramp when the SBR is active. For applications with changing loads it is recommended to increase p969/p989. The value in p969 needs to be larger than the value in p9690. This condition is checked when leaving the safety commissioning. SI response to selecting SLS / SI SLS response Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: Defines the response after the initiation of the safely limited speed (SLS). p9692 = p9892 = 0 (mode 0): The fact that the actual speed at initiation of the safely limited speed exceeds the safe limit value parameterised in p969/p989 is interpreted as fault, wherefore a safe stop followed by a latched safe torque off is initiated. If, however, the actual speed at initiation of the safely limited speed lies below the upper limit parameterised in p969/p989 the drives frequency control channel is blocked, wherefore the actual drive frequency cannot be controlled by an external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.) anymore. The drive will then be locked at the current speed. p9692 = p9892 = (mode ): The fact that the actual speed at initiation of the safely limited speed exceeds the safe limit value is not interpreted as fault, wherefore the safe brake ramp function is initiated automatically. The target speed is not zero (as it usually is at SS) but rather a parameterisable value (p9690/p9890) just below the tolerance value parameterised in p969/p989. If the actual speed lies below the parameterised speed (p9690/p9890) the brake ramp does not need to be activated and the actual speed does not need to be changed, thus the behaviour would be the same as safely limited speed mode 0. After initiating the function safely limited speed and braking the drive down to the parameterised speed (p9690/ p9890) by using the safe brake ramp the drives frequency control channel is blocked, wherefore the actual drive frequency cannot be controlled by an external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.) anymore. The drive will then be locked at a constant speed, which is parameterised in p9690/p9890. p9692 = p9892 = 2 (mode 2): After initiating the safely limited speed function only the monitoring ramp will be activated. The safe brake ramp will not be activated, therefore, it would be the responsibility of the customer to ramp the drive down to or below the SLS setpoint (p9690/9890), before activating SLS. The drive frequency is then controlled by the external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.). Now, setting the control channel to a frequency, which exceeds the parameterised limit in p969/p989, is interpreted as fault condition, wherefore a latched safe torque off is initiated immediately. Values: 0: Initiate STO with braking ramp and drive fault when f > f_sls : Activate braking ramp while f > f_sls 2: Initiate STO without braking ramp and with drive fault while f 350 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

351 .9 List of r9760 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI internal password / SI intern password Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Contains the current safety password. For safety commissioning or safety reset the value of r9760 has to be entered into p976. If the password in p976 is not set correctly to the value in r9760, none of the safety parameters can be written and a fault F659 is generated. This parameter is changed automatically to the password in p9763 when the new value of p9762 is identical to the confirmation password in p9763. p976 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI input password / SI input password Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: p9762 G20 (CU240S DP- F) The safety password of r9760 is entered in this parameter to get access to changing the safety parameters. If p976 is not identical to r9760 a fault F659 is generated. The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set. The range of the password values are 000 to SI change password / SI change password Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: p9763 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Parameter to change the safety password. The new safety password is entered in p9762 and then confirmed by entering same value in p9763. The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set. The range of the password values are 000 to The values in p9762 and p9763 are set to zero automatically when the new password is accepted. SI change password confirmation / SI passwd. confirm Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32 Can be changed: Confirm a safety password change. Parameter needs to be set to the same value as p9762. Only then then password change of p9762 is stored in r9760 as new password. If p9763 is not identical to p9762, both values are cleared and r9760 is not updated. The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set. The range of the password values are 000 to The values in p9762 and p9763 are set to zero automatically when the new password is accepted. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 35

352 .9 List of r9770[0...5] SI Firmware version / SI FW version G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the SI and Ps version. r977 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Example: r9770[0] = 2, r9770[] =, r9770[2] = 3 is for safety version V r9770[3] = 2, r9770[4] =, r9770[5] = 3 is for PROFIsafe version V [0] = Safety major release [] = Safety minor release [2] = Safety baselevel (patch) [3] = PROFIsafe major release [4] = PROFIsafe minor release [5] = PROFIsafe baselevel (patch) CO/BO: SI hardware functions / SI hw functions Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the available safety functions of the drive (bit coded). Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Safe shutdown path available Yes No - 0 Sensorless safety speed monitoring available Yes No - r9772 CO/BO: SI status word / SI StatWd G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Displays the status of safety integrated. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 Safe torque off (STO) selected Yes No - 0 Safe torque off (STO) activated Yes No - 02 Safe stop (SS) selected Yes No - 03 Safe stop (SS) activated Yes No - 04 Safely reduced speed (SLS) selected Yes No - 05 Safely reduced speed (SLS) reached Yes No - 06 reserved Yes No - 07 reserved Yes No - 08 Latched safe torque off (LSTO) active, drive Yes No - fault 4 Safe Brake active Yes No - 5 Dynamisation required Yes No - For further informations to the meaning of the bits see the descriptions of the safety functions STO, SS and SLS in the manual. r9798 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI display checksum / SI act. checksum Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Display of safety checksum for P. The checksum changes when CRC-relevant safety parameters of P are changed (parameter range p p9699, except p9659). 352 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

353 .9 List of This checksum must be identical to the value in r9898 before the safety commissioning can be finished via p3900 = 0. If r9798 differs from r9898 the CRC-relevant safety parameters of P differ from that of P2. Check the parameters of P against that of P2 and correct the mistake. When r9798 and r9898 differ, the safety commissioning can always be left via p3900 =, thus discarding the last changes. p9799 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI parameter checksum / SI checksum Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: hex FFFF hex 0000 hex Confirm checksum of the P safety parameters. The correct value has to be entered before leaving the safety commissioning with p3900 = 0. p980 G20 (CU240S DP), G20 (CU240S) Only if r9798, r9898, p9799 and p9899 are all identical, the commissioning can be finished. Enter the reading of r9798 or r9898 into p9799 once no more safety parameters need to be changed. SI enable parameter / SI enable param. Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: - Double of parameter p960. See there. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 reserved Yes No - 0 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No - STO bin On non-safety hardware units, p980 is zero by default. p980 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI enable parameter / SI enable param. Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: - Double of parameter p960. See there. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 reserved Yes No - 0 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No - STO 0000 bin 0000 bin On non-safety hardware units, p980 is zero by default. p9802 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI enable safe brake monitoring / SI brake mon. ena Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: Double of parameter p9602. See there. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 353

354 .9 List of Values: 0: Disable monitoring of safe brake control : Enable monitoring of safe brake control p9803 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Selection of Safety Source / SI Source select Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: bin Double of parameter p9603. See there. Bit field: Bit Signal name signal 0 signal FP 00 SLS activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 0 SLS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 02 SS activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 03 SS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 04 STO activated via FDIA and FDIB Yes No - 05 STO activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No - 07 STO, SS, SLS activated via PROFIsafe Yes No - p980 G20 (CU240S DP- F) PROFIsafe destination address / F dest address Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: T Defines the PROFIsafe destination address for the CB (communication board). The PROFIsafe destination address is identical to the PROFIBUS address by default. This parameter can be changed via a user-entered value. Valid PROFIsafe address settings: : default, forces PROFIsafe address to be identical with the PROFIBUS address. If the PROFIsafe destination address is set manually to a value which is unequal to the PROFIBUS address, it will not be automatically adjusted when the PROFIBUS address is changed. This applies when the PROFIBUS address is set via DIP switches as well as via parameter 98. p9850 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Safe Digital Input debounce delay time / SI Debounce FDI Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] Double of parameter p9650. See there. The debounce delay time in p9850 is entered in seconds! 354 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

355 .9 List of p985 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI Safe Digital Input filter delay time / SI Filt. time FDI Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] 0.00 [] p9880 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Double of parameter p965. See there. The filter delay time in p985 is entered in seconds! SI braking ramp delay / SI braking delay Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] p988 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Double of parameter p9680. See there. The delay time in p9880 is entered in seconds! SI braking ramp down time / SI ramp down time Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] p9882 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Double of parameter p968. See there. The ramp down time in p988 is entered in seconds! SI minimum speed for standstill detection / SI min standstill Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] p9890 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Double of parameter p9682. See there. The standstill detection frequency in p9882 is entered in khz! SI setpoint for SLS / SI setpoint SLS Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] Double of parameter p9690. See there. The setpoint in p9890 is entered in khz! Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 355

356 .9 List of p989 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI tolerance for SLS / SI tolerance SLS Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point Can be changed: [] [] p9892 G20 (CU240S DP- F) Double of parameter p969. See there. The tolerance in p989 is entered in khz! SI response to selecting SLS / SI SLS response Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: Double of parameter p9692. See there. Values: 0: Initiate STO with braking ramp and drive fault when f > f_sls : Activate braking ramp while f > f_sls 2: Initiate STO without braking ramp and with drive fault while f r9898 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI display checksum / SI act. checksum Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Display of safety checksum for P2 parameters. The checksum changes when safety parameters for P2 are changed (parameter range p p9892). This checksum must be identical to the value in r9798 before the safety commissioning can be finished via p3900 = 0. If r9898 differs from r9798, the safety parameters on P2 differ from the safety parameters on P. Check the safety parameters and correct the mistake. The safety commissioning can always be left via p3900 =, thus discarding the last changes. p9899 G20 (CU240S DP- F) SI parameter checksum / SI checksum Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned6 Can be changed: hex FFFF hex 0000 hex Confirm checksum of the safety parameters. Enter the reading of r9798 or r9898 into p9899 once the safety parametrisation is complete. r6000[ ] Profinet name of station / PN name of station G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 PROFINET name of station. r600[0...] Profinet IP address / PN IP adr G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 PROFINET IP address. 356 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

357 .9 List of r6002[0...] Profinet MAC adrress / PN MAC adr G20 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned8 PROFINET MAC address. Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 357

358 .9 List of 358 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

359 Function diagrams Function diagrams 2 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 359

360 Function diagrams ParName Min... Max [Dim] PNumber.C/D [3] (Default) ParName [Dim] PNumber.C/D [3] Binector input (Setting parameter) ParName [Dim] PNum.C/D (Default) T 0 Binector output (Monitoring parameter) ParName Parameter text PNum Parameter number Connector input (Setting parameter) ParName (Default) PNum.C/D [3] Connector output (Monitoring parameter) ParName Parameter text [Unit] PNum [3] Parameter number [Number indexes] Connector/Binector output (Monitoring parameter) ParName PNum PNum 0 T T T2 & _Symbols.vsd Symbols in funktion diagrams V2.0 y x Kp Tn Hysteresis 0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G { Explanation of symbols used in the function diagrams Setting parameters Parameter text Minimum... Maximum value [Unit] Parameter number.command/drive data set [Number indexes] (Default) x y Summation Multiplication Division Monitoring parameters BICO parameters Parameter text [Unit] Parameter number.command/drive data set [Number indexes] Parameter text [Unit] Parameter number.command/drive data set (Default) 0 Switch Selection switch ( out of 4) ON delay Parameter text Parameter number.command/drive data set [Number indexes] (Default) Parameter text Parameter number OFF delay ON and OFF delay AND gate OR gate NOT gate NOT gate A D A/D converter D A D/A converter Filter element Gain element Integrator PI controller Differentiator Limitation Limitation Characteristic 360 Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

361 Function diagrams External interfaces DI 2000 DO 200 AI 2200 AO 2300 BOP USS on RS USS on RS Fieldbus Encoder Overview General Overview Internal setpoint source JOG MOP 300 FF Fixed PID setpoint PID MOP Technology functions Monitoring Braking Restart Flying Restart 4600 Vdc Control 4600 Vdc_min Control (KIB) Positioning ramp down Free function blocks 3 Setpoint channel Motor control Modulator V/f control Flux setpoint 5000 SUM setpoint 500 PID controller Speed / torque control Motor model Current control 7900 n iot M US GO/J c le es MFA GFR DOM Motor identification Motor and inverter protection, Adaption of motor parameters Sequence control Parameterization _Overview.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 36

362 Function diagrams DI DO CO/BO:Bin.inp.val r0722 r0722 BI:Fct. of DO0 P073 [3] (52:3) BI:Enable JOG -> P055 [3] (0:0) BI:Enable JOG <- P056 [3] (0:0) AI AO BOP USS on RS485 Fieldbus USS on RS232 CO: AI scal[4000h] r CI:AO P077 [2] (2:0) CO/BO:BOP CtrlWd r009 r009 CO: PZD<-COM(USS) r208 8 BO: CtrlWd <- COM r2036 BO: CtrlWd2 <- COM r2037 CI:PZD->COM (USS) P209 [8] (52:0) CO: PZD from CB r BO: CtrlWd <- CB r2090 BO: CtrlWd2 <- CB r209 CI:PZD to CB P205 [8] (52:0) CO: PZD<-USS r205 8 BO: CtrlWd <- USS r2032 BO: CtrlWd2 <- USS r2033 CI:PZD->USS P206 [8] (52:0) BI:Enable MOP(UP) P035 [3] (9:3) BI:Enable MOP(DWN P036 [3] (9:4) BI:FF sel. Bit 0 P020 [3] (722:3) BI:FF sel. Bit P02 [3] (0:0) BI:FF sel. Bit 2 P022 [3] (0:0) BI:FF sel. Bit 3 P023 [3] (0:0) BI:PID setp->bit P2220 [3] (722:3) BI:PID setp->bit P222 [3] (722:4) BI:PID setp->bit P2222 [3] (722:5) BI:PID setp->bit P2223 [3] (0:0) BI:PID-MOP (UP) P2235 [3] (2090:3) BI:PID-MOP (DWN) P2236 [3] (2090:4) MOP FF FF PID PID MOP 2 Overview Connection of External and Internal Setpoints 3 JOG Enable 0000 bin bin P057 (000 bin) 0 0 CO: MOP outp.freq. r050 CI:Add. Setpoint P075 [3] (0:0) CI:Add. setp.scal P076 [3] (:0) BI:Disab.add.setp P074 [3] (0:0) CO: Act. FF r024 CI:Main setp scal P07 [3] (:0) CI:Main setpoint P070 [3] (2050:) CI:PID setpoint P2253 [3] (0:0) CI:PID trim sourc P2254 [3] (0:0) CO: Fixed.PID setp r2224 CI:PID feedback P2264 [3] (755:0) BI:Enab. PID ctrl P2200 [3] (0:0) CO: MOP outp. setp r JOG frequency P058 [3] (5.00) JOG frequency < P059 [3] (5.00) SUM SUM/JOG selection CO: Tot. freq.setp r PID controller CO: Act.PID output r2294 BI:Inh. neg. setp P0 [3] (0:0) BI:Reverse P3 [3] (2090:) BI:RFG enable P40 [3] (2090:4) _BICO_Overv.vsd V2.0 BI:ON/OFF P0840 [3] (722:0) AFM RFG V/f FOC Imax contr.... BI:ON reverse/off P0842 [3] (0:0) BI:. OFF2 P0844 [3] (:0) BI:2. OFF2 P0845 [3] (9:) BI:. OFF3 P0848 [3] (:0) BI:2. OFF3 P0849 [3] (:0) BI:Pulse enable P0852 [3] (:0) CO/BO:Act StatWd r0052 r0052 CO/BO:Act StatWd2 r0053 r0053 CO/BO:Act CtrlWd r0054 r0054 CO/BO:Act CtrlWd2 r0055 r Function diagram SINAMICS G20 Sequence control Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

363 Function diagrams P24 (KL9) External Interfaces Digital Inputs (DI) 2 Debounce time: DI P0724 (3) 24 V KL5 T 0 CO/BO:Bin.inp.val r0722 & r0722 r V Debounce time: DI P0724 (3) V KL6 T 0 & 0 V _Digital_In.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 363

364 Function diagrams External Interfaces Digital Outputs (DO) 2 BI:Fct. of DO0 P073 [3] (52:3) BI:Fct. of DO P0732 [3] (52:7) BI:Fct. of DO2 P0733 [3] (0:0) 3 Invert DOs P0748 (0000 bin) 0 - Invert DOs P0748 (0000 bin) Invert DOs P0748 (0000 bin) CO/BO:State DOs r0747 r CO/BO:State DOs r0747 r0747. CO/BO:State DOs r0747 r COM NO NC Kl.20 Kl.9 Kl.8 COM Kl.22 NO Kl.2 COM NO NC Kl.25 Kl.24 Kl _Digital_Out.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

365 Function diagrams A D External Interfaces Analog Input (AI) 2 3 % 00 % ASPmax y2 y x x2,3 T V _Analog_In.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G r o V 02A m Analog input Type of AI P0756 [2] (0) Switching bipolar unipolar Smooth time AI P0753 [2] (3) Type of AI P0756 [2] (0) Value x:ai scal P0757 [2] (0) Value x2:ai scal P0759 [2] (0) AI deadband width P076 [2] (0) Value y2:ai scal P0760 [2] (00.0) Value y:ai scal P0758 [2] (0.0) ASPmin xd 4000 h 0 V 20 ma x00% V ma Digit Volts or ma Act.AI inp.[v/ma] r0752 [2] Type of AI P0756 [2] (0) 50 % of P076 Delay on sig. los P0762 [2] (0) Warning, signal lost (F0080) AI after scal.[%] r0754 [2] CO: AI scal[4000h] r CO/BO:AI status Wd r075 r075 CO/BO:Bin.inp.val r0722 r r r Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 365

366 Function diagrams Smooth time AO P0773 [2] (2) CI:AO (2:0) P077 [2] External Interfaces Analog Output (AO) Enable ab. value P0775 [2] (0) 0 2 Value y2:ao scal P0780 [2] (20) Value y:ao scal P0778 [2] (0) x(t) 3 Type of AO 0... P0776 [2] (0) ma y00% 20 ma y2 y P078 4 Value x:ao scal P0777 [2] (0.0) 4000 h 20 ma x 5 AO deadband width P078 [2] (0) Value x2:ao scal P0779 [2] (00.0) Act.AO val.[v/ma] r0774 [2] Analog output x2 D % x20ma 00 % A CO/BO:AO stat Wd r0785 r _Analog_Out.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B

367 Function diagrams Basic Operator Panel BOP Seven-segment display Raise key Toggle key Reversing key ON key OFF key JOG key Program key Lower key 2 3 External Interfaces Basic Operator Panel (BOP) FN P JOG 0 4 Operating display (r0000) selected and operation= of sequence control V V 5 V Fn 5 V P 5 V 5 V 5 V 0 5 Activation of the raise and lower keys is only effective if the operating display (r0000) is selected, a changeover to the value display has taken place with the toggle key and the unit is in the "Operation" status. CO/BO:BOP CtrlWd r009 r009 CO/BO:BOP CtrlWd r009 r009.d.d.e.e Raise motor potentiometer from BOP Lower motor potentiometer from BOP Toggle key to operating system, fault acknowledgement Access parameters Actuation of sevensegment display & SET (Q=) CO/BO:BOP CtrlWd r009 r009.b.b Positive direction of rotation from BOP & POWER ON RESET (Q=0) Priority RESET 2 SET Set command SET (Q=) CO/BO:BOP CtrlWd r009 r009.. ON/OFF, OFF2, OFF3 from BOP Reset command RESET (Q=0) Priority RESET 2 SET POWER ON _BOP.vsd V2.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G Parameter Manual, 04/2006, A5E B 367